JP6842176B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention is a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated. Regarding.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a variable display game is executed based on the fact that the game ball wins a prize (starting prize) at the starting port provided in the game area.
A special gaming state is generated based on the result of the variable display game being a special result (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-223632

At the start and end of the special game state, a certain effect period is provided and various effects can be executed, but the content to be shown to the player in relation to the special game state often differs depending on the game state, and is constant. It was not possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the game just by performing the production. An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result.
A game control means that controls the game in an integrated manner,
A special variable winning device that is opened in the special gaming state is provided.
The special result is
It is possible to change the probability of being derived according to the gaming state, and the first special result that generates the first special gaming state by the derivation and
The probability of being derived is constant regardless of the gaming state, and there is a second special result that generates a second special gaming state by the derivation.
The probability that the second special result is derived is higher than the probability that the first special result is derived.
The game control means
The fanfare period, which is the period from the start of the second special gaming state to the start of opening of the special variable winning device, can be set.
Even in the second special game state based on the same second special result, the game state when the second special result is derived is specified that the fluctuation time of the variation display game is shorter than the normal game state. In the game state, the fanfare period can be made longer than in the normal game state.

According to the present invention, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of a special variable winning device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining the initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & prize-winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining the effect command setting process. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormal fluctuation monitoring process. Special FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a change in the number of abnormal fluctuations. Special FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example in which anomalous fluctuation notification is performed. It is a flowchart explaining the game machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port 1 switch processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port 2 switch processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening switch monitoring process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation start process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating an information setting process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 information setting process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2-byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining the sorting process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during fluctuation. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during display of special figure 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of special figure 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of special figure 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process in a fanfare / interval process. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during small hit fanfare. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit residual sphere processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol variation control process. It is a flowchart explaining the segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the start port 1 signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main prize ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol fixed number signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot system command processing. It is a figure explaining the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is a figure explaining the decoration special result. It is a figure explaining an example of execution mode of the decoration game in a low probability state. It is a figure explaining an example of execution mode of the decoration game in a high probability state. It is a figure explaining an example of the decoration game in a specific execution mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect when a small hit occurs in a low probability state. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect when a small hit occurs in a high probability state. It is a figure explaining an example of the notification in the notification unit. It is a flowchart explaining the count effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the notification information setting process. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by a game point. It is a figure explaining the decoration special result in the 1st modification.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (
It is assembled to the support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) has a front frame 1
It is stored in a storage unit (not shown) formed on the front side of 2. In addition, the front frame (main body frame) 1
In 2, a glass frame 15 (with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 (transparent member) 14 is provided.
Transparent plate holding frame) is attached.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations, effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (which supplies a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown))
(Reservoir), the upper plate ball outlet 22 from which the game balls paid out from the payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 flow out, and the upper plate 21 paid out with the upper plate 21 full. A lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing, an operation unit 24 of a ball launching device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 21
On the upper edge, a production button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from a player
Is provided with a built-in effect button 25. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25.
Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided. In this embodiment, the touch panel 2
Although 9 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, and the display surface of the sub display device is provided. The touch panel 29 may be provided on the surface.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. Balance display section that displays the balance of the prepaid card (not shown)
Etc. are provided. In the game machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game board 30.
Fire toward the front game area 32. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30.
It is configured to be surrounded by 3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 including a variable display device 4 which is one of the board effect devices 44 and has rotatable reels 6a, 6b, 6c and a display device 41 is arranged. There is. The variation display device 4 and the display device 41 are attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the fluctuation display device 4 and the display device 41 so as to project forward from the fluctuation display device 4 and the display device 41 and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32. ..

The variation display device 4 operates a reel 6 in response to the special figure variation display game to display a plurality of identification information in a variable manner and then stops and displays a decorative special figure variation display game. The variation display device 4 makes it possible to visually recognize a symbol that is variablely displayed by the operation of the reel 6 from the symbol display window 5 (window portion). The reels 6 are a cylindrical left reel 6a, a middle reel 6b, and a right reel 6.
c is arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 6a, 6b, 6c so as to be arranged along the circumferential direction. Further, each reel 6a, 6b, 6c is provided with a reel motor which is a stepping motor, and each reel 6a, 6b, 6c can be operated independently. That is, the reel motor serves as an electrical drive source for driving the reels 6a, 6b, 6c.

By operating the reel 6 with the reel motor, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 5 are changed to circulate from top to bottom, or to sway (variation display). ). On the other hand, when the reels 6 are stopped, each reel 6a,
For 6b and 6c, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols, that is, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3, can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 5. That is, through the design display window 5,
Decorative special figure fluctuation display The effective display units of the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the game can be visually recognized. Therefore, the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c form a plurality of variable display units capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols.

A predetermined effective line is set for the 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 5. In this embodiment, the upper line that crosses the upper symbols of each reel 6a, 6b, 6c, the middle line that crosses the middle symbol, the lower line that crosses the lower symbol, the left reel 6a lower-middle reel 6b middle-right reel 6c upper A line that diagonally crosses each reel 6a, 6b, 6c (
The effective line is a line (downward right line) that diagonally crosses each reel 6a, 6b, 6c from the upper right reel 6a-middle reel 6b middle-right reel 6c lower row. The result is displayed by the symbol combination mode (roll) formed on this effective line.

Returning to FIG. 2, the display device 41 (variable display device) may be, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or CR.
It is composed of a device having a display screen such as a T (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information about the game such as a character that directs the special figure variation display game and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41. Further, on the right side of the center case 40, the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, and the third notification unit 72 are provided with LEDs capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors.
A notification unit 72c and a fourth notification unit 72d are provided. The notification unit 72 has acquired a function of notifying the number of times the special result is derived and a function from the end of the special game state to the derivation of the next special result during the advantageous period described later in which the player can acquire a large number of prize balls. It has a function of notifying information on the number of prize balls, and is adapted to notify such information depending on the light emitting mode of the LED.

At the upper left portion of the center case 40, a point notification unit 73 for notifying game points given by satisfying a predetermined condition in the game is provided. The point notification unit 73 includes four display units of 10000 points, 5000 points, 1000 points, and 100 points, each of which is provided with an LED. When notifying the game points to be given, each display unit is turned on in sequence like a roulette wheel, and then the corresponding display unit is turned on. FIG. 2 shows that 100 points were awarded.

Further, in the lower left portion of the center case 40, a cumulative value notification unit 74 indicating the cumulative value of the game points acquired in a predetermined period is provided. Further, above the cumulative value notification unit 74,
An expectation level notification unit 75 is provided to notify the expectation level at which the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit based on the acquired game points. The expectation level notification unit 75 includes five light emitting units, and the light emitting unit lights up according to the game points acquired in a predetermined period, and the larger the number of lighting units, the higher the expectation level.

Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are three general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 7).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game is provided.
The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 7). Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a second start winning opening 37 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 7).

At the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a gate 34 for giving a start condition of a special game state is provided, and the gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a capable of detecting a passing game ball. .. The special game state is started when the game ball passes through the gate 34 after a special result that is a big hit in the special figure variation display game is derived. Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32,
On the right side of the first start winning opening 36, a first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. Has been done.

The first special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and is the result of a special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the upper prize opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, an upper winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by an upper winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7) as a driving device, and is provided with a big hit or a small hit. During the special game state based on the above, by converting the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening is facilitated, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). ) Is given.

Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), the upper prize opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 7) is arranged as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper prize opening. There is. In the game machine of the present embodiment, two upper prize opening switches 38a are provided, and the game ball flowing into the upper prize opening is detected by any of the upper prize opening switches 38a.
By providing a plurality of upper prize opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the upper prize opening.

Immediately below the first start winning opening 36, a second special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) 39 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. Has been done. The second special variable winning device 39 includes an opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in.

The second special variable winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and is the result of a special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the lower prize opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 includes, for example, a lower winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 39c driven by a lower winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 7) as a driving device, and is provided with a big hit or a small hit. During the special game state based on, the lower prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the lower prize opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). ) Is given.

Inside the lower prize opening (winning area), a lower prize opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 7) is arranged as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .. Further, below the second special variable winning device 39, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

The arrangement of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is not limited to this. For example, in FIG. 2, the second special variable winning device 39 may be provided adjacent to the upper side or the lower side of the first special variable winning device 38. In this case, it may be completely overlapped on the top and bottom, or it may be shifted to the left and right so that only a part of it overlaps on the top and bottom. In addition, the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c are not limited to the attacker type, and the large winning opening can be opened by sliding a plate-shaped member capable of closing the large winning opening. It may be in the form of.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 in which the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the player can aim for a prize in the first start winning opening 36 and launches the game ball to the right game area. By (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for a prize in the second start winning opening 37 or the first special variable winning device 38. The second special variable winning device 39 can be aimed at by firing a game ball in either the left or right game area.

Here, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is launched into the right game area. The game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. Since the material at least on the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like can see the flow path. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, which form the special figure variable display game, and various information are collectively displayed. A display device 50 is provided.

The batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like.
Consists of a special figure 1 display (1st special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 for a variable display game, a special figure 2 display (2nd special figure variable display unit) 52 for a special figure 2 variable display game, and an LED lamp. Special Figure 1 The storage display unit 54 for notifying the start memory number of the variable display game is provided.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is opened and closed), left-handed (normal) and right-handed. The first method of notifying the player of the hitting method (the hitting method corresponding to the game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A game state display unit 56 and a probability display unit 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game are provided. The batch display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on.
A display unit (display) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of a big hit may be provided. Further, a normal game is executed like a conventional game machine, and a second start winning opening is formed in which a game ball can be won based on a specific result of the game. When equipped with a variable winning device, a normal map display unit that displays the normal map variable display game, a memory display unit for notifying the start memory number of the normal map variable display game, and a time-saving state that lights up when a time-saving state occurs. A time-saving state notification unit or the like may be provided to notify the user.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven. It is displayed that it is changing, and special figure 1
It is configured so that it can be distinguished from the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode of the hit is turned on and the game result is displayed.

The storage display unit 54 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. ,lighting blinking)
Display by. The round display unit 55 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn on. The round display unit 55 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

In the first game state display unit 56, for example, when the left-handed is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed in the game state (normal hitting), all the LEDs are turned off and the right-handed is more right-handed than the left-handed. When the gaming state is more advantageous to the player (when hitting to the right), all the LEDs are turned on. The probability display unit 57 turns off all LEDs when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), and all L's when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability variation state).
Turn on the ED.

FIG. 3 shows the probabilities of big hits and small hits, the distribution probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won, and the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) without the operation of the condition device. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2.
The probabilities in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, and the specific gaming state, which is a high probability state, are shown in FIG.
The probability is as shown in (a). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the derivation of the first special result in the low probability state is the first time, and in the period until the number of derivations of the first special result reaches 5, the high probability state is set after the end of the special game state. It is configured to do. A low probability state is set after the end of the special gaming state based on the fifth first special result. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 3 (b). This small hit probability is higher in Special Figure 2 than in Special Figure 1. In addition, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit will not be won in duplicate.

Further, FIG. 3 (c) shows the jackpot types that can be selected in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the special variable winning device that is opened for each jackpot type, and the distribution probability, and FIG. 3 (d) shows the special hit type. The small hit types that can be selected in FIGS. 1 and 2, the special variable winning device that is opened for each small hit type, the opening time, the number of opening times, and the distribution probability are shown. It is said that the small hit 2 can be derived from either the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. It should be noted that the small hit may not be provided in the special figure 1 but may be set only in the special figure 2.

4 and 5 show fluctuation patterns of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 4A shows a fluctuation pattern in the case where the result is out of order in the low probability state. As described above, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first start winning opening 36 by hitting left, and aiming for a prize in the second starting winning opening 37 by hitting right. It has become. That is, it is possible to select whether to mainly execute the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game according to the player's intention. Further, depending on the game state, the game is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly played, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to proceed mainly with the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the low probability state, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main fluctuation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular fluctuation. In order for the player to proceed with the game according to this design, with respect to the special figure 2, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected regardless of which variation pattern is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal gaming state, the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game. The probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game. FIG. 2 The execution of the variable display game is made inefficient in terms of time, and in the low probability state, the player is made to proceed mainly with the special figure 1 variable display game.

FIG. 4B shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is out of order in a high probability state. In this case, only one variation pattern is selected. In this high-probability state, contrary to the case of the low-probability state described above, the special figure 2 variation display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 1 variation display game is designed to be the irregular variation.

Here, the fluctuation time in the case of a deviation result in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the irregular fluctuation occurs in the high probability state is the deviation result in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the irregular fluctuation occurs in the low probability state. It is set shorter than the fluctuation time of (see FIG. 4 (a)). This is because, as will be described later, a short time is set as the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a big hit or a small hit in a high probability state.

In other words, in the high probability state where the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and it can be executed efficiently in terms of time, the special figure 1 variable display game with a low probability of a small hit is clearly disadvantageous, so much. Even if a long fluctuation time is not set, the player can proceed with the game mainly in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Therefore, it is not necessary to set an unnecessarily long fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, but when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed at the same time, the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly used. As the game progresses, the fluctuation time is set to be sufficiently longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the game is forcibly stopped by a big hit or a small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game.

FIG. 5A shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a big hit in a low probability state. With respect to the special figure 2, only the fluctuation pattern that does not generate the reach state can be selected. In the low probability state, the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit may be a fluctuation time longer than the variable time which can be selected when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit. Figure 5
(B) shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a big hit in a high probability state. None of them generate a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected.

In particular, for the special figure 1 variable display game, a short variable time is selected when compared including the variable time that can be selected when a big hit or a small hit is obtained in the special figure 2 variable display game. This increases the possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game, which has irregular fluctuations even in a high probability state, stops before the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main fluctuation, and is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game. Is less likely to be forcibly changed to a missed result. Although the variation pattern of Special Figure 2 is sorted according to the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be determined by a random number or the like.

FIG. 5C shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a small hit in a low probability state. With respect to the special figure 2, the reach state is not generated, and the long fluctuation in which the fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. FIG. 5D shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a small hit in a high probability state. None of them generate a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected. The special figure 1 variable display game has the same time as the case of the loss in the high probability state, but this is also forcibly stopped by the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game as in the case of the loss. It's enough time to be played. Regarding the fluctuation time when the special figure 1 variable display game is missed or a small hit in a high probability state, if it is sufficient time to be forcibly stopped by the big hit or small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. , May be shorter than the time shown here.

FIG. 6 shows a special variable winning device in a special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on a big hit (first special result) and a special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on a small hit (second special result). The opening and closing pattern of is shown. When the jackpot type is 16R jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the upper big winning opening opening / closing pattern 1. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, the opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). Then 2
The round in which the interval period of 000 ms and the open period of 29000 ms are set is repeated up to 16 rounds, and after the ending period of 11000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends. In addition, the jackpot type is 1 in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game.
When a 0R jackpot is achieved, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 2. This opening / closing pattern differs only in the number of rounds from the opening / closing pattern of the 16R jackpot.

The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each opening / closing pattern is the time obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1 in the first half
400 ms is the remaining sphere processing time, and 600 ms in the latter half is the interval time. Further, the ending period in the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 9600 ms in the latter half is the ending time.

Regarding the opening and closing pattern of small hits, the fanfare period, opening period, interval period (including remaining ball processing time) and ending period (including remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure.
According to this, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. In addition, in both the opening and closing patterns of big hits and small hits, if a specified number of prizes are won in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that point. The opening time of the small hit is shorter than the opening time of the big hit, and the number of winnings to the special variable winning device in the special gaming state is small. Therefore, the small hit has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the big hit. That is, the special result includes the first special result (which can generate the first special gaming state).
A big hit) and a second special result (small hit) that can generate a second special gaming state in which the gaming value that can be given to the player is lower than that of the first special gaming state are included.

As for the opening / closing pattern of the small hit, the lengths of the fanfare period and the ending period differ depending on whether or not the player is in the specific game state, and the opening / closing pattern is made longer in the case of the specific game state. As will be described later, in the specific game state, these times are secured in order to perform effects such as notification of small hits and notification of the number of prize balls by winning a prize. In addition, since small hits occur frequently in the specific game state, the time required to digest the special game state is lengthened by lengthening the fanfare period and the ending period so that the number of prize balls per unit time does not become too large. There is. Further, the opening time of the special variable winning device is the same regardless of whether or not it is in the specific gaming state. Here, in the opening / closing pattern of each small hit, only one opening is performed, but it is also possible to perform a plurality of opening. In this case, the interval time for temporarily closing the special variable winning device is the same regardless of whether or not it is in the specific gaming state.

Although both the length of the fanfare period and the length of the ending period are different depending on whether or not the game is in a specific game state, only one of them may be different. Further, with respect to the opening / closing pattern of the jackpot, one or both of the lengths of the fanfare period and the ending period may be different depending on whether or not the game is in a specific gaming state.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. When the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, the game is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. Also,
When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply called a hit (special result). When the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball (a game ball () from a launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32.
The game is performed by launching a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35 and the first starting winning opening 36, 2nd start winning opening 37
, 1st special variable winning device 38 or 2nd special variable winning device 39, or a game area 32
It flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost part of the above and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the type of winning opening is changed. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 7) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

The winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 are detected as the starting winning balls of the special figure 1 variable display game by the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided inside, and a predetermined upper limit number (1st starting memory) (
For example, up to 4) are stored. Special Figure 1 The variable display game can be started, and
When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36 while the first start memory number is 0, the first start memory is stored with the generation of the start right, and the first start memory number is added by 1. At the same time, the special figure 1 variation display game is immediately started based on the first start memory, and at this time, the first start memory number is subtracted by 1. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. In addition, when the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36, if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first start memory number is added by 1 and one first start memory is stored. .. Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game can be started in a state where the first start memory number is 1 or more (the end of the previous special figure 1 variable display game or the end of the special game state), the first The number of start-up memories is subtracted by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start-up memory.

The winning ball to the second starting winning opening 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. If there is a prize in the second start winning opening 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. In addition, even if the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 37, the second start memory does not occur. In addition, when the second start winning opening 37 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the second start memory is temporarily generated for the convenience of processing, but the second start memory is Since it will be digested immediately, the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur.

Further, when the start winning ball is detected, a jackpot random number value, a jackpot symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as start memory information, and the extracted random number value is in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 7). A predetermined number of times (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory.
For example, the first start memory is stored up to 4 times). Then, the stored number of the special figure start memory is displayed on the storage display unit 54 (special figure 1 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Decorative special figure Displayed as a start memory display.

The game control device 100 plays the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display device) based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36 or the first start memory, and the second start. Winning opening 3
Based on the prize in 7, the special figure 2 variable display game is played on the special figure 2 display 52 (second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game has a special result (big hit or small hit). If this happens, one of the special figure fluctuation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result).

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the variable display, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit, and the game ball passes through the gate 34 and the gate switch 34
Based on the detection in a (see FIG. 7), the first special gaming state (so-called big hit state) is set. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode).
Then, it becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 is the first variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 (
This is the first variable display means capable of displaying the special figure 1 variable display game). In addition, special figure 2 display 52
Is a second variable display means capable of displaying a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on a winning of a game ball to the second start winning opening 37.

Further, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed on the variable display device 4 and the display device 41. The decoration special figure variation display game to be made to be executed is to be executed. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the variable display device 4 and the display device 41 variablely display the decoration identification information corresponding to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It is a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the game machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game, but in the case of the normal game state in which the probability is low, the variable time is used as the variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. Very long (about 10 minutes) long variation is selected. As a result, in the normal game state, special figure 2
The execution of the variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit left and aim at the first start winning opening 36 to play the special figure 1 variable display game. The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

Then, when a big hit occurs and a special game state is reached, the first special variable winning device 38 can be aimed by right-handed striking. When the second special variable winning device 39 is opened in a special game state based on a big hit or a small hit, it is possible to aim with either a right-handed hit or a left-handed hit. After the end of the special gaming state based on the jackpot, the specific gaming state, which is a high probability state, may be reached.
In this specific game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short, so it is advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game by hitting right to aim at the second start winning opening 37. It becomes. In the specific game state, the opening of the special variable winning device based on the small hit and the opening of the special variable winning device based on the big hit occur frequently, and the player can acquire a large amount of game balls.

From the above, when the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (1st starting winning opening 36, 2nd starting winning opening 37) and the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. In the game machine 10 that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player, a game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a special variable winning device (first) that is opened in the special game state.
A special variable winning device 38 and a second special variable winning device 39) are provided, and the game control means includes a fanfare period, which is a period from the start of the special gaming state to the start of opening of the special variable winning device, and a special gaming state. It is possible to set the ending period, which is the period from the end of the opening of the last special variable winning device in the above to the end of the special gaming state, and even if the special gaming state is based on the same special result, the relevant It is possible to make one or both lengths of the fanfare period and the ending period different depending on the game state when the special result is derived. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the first starting winning opening 36 forming the starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening 37 forming the starting winning opening 37
The first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) that executes the first variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36, and the game ball to the second starting winning opening 37. The second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) that executes the second variable display game based on the winning prize, and the specific game state in which the execution time of the second variable display game is set to be shorter than the normal state. With a specific game state generating means (game control device 100) capable of generating
The game control means determines the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period in the special game state based on the same special result, as compared with the case where the game state when the special result is derived is not the specific game state. The game state at the time of derivation is set to be longer when the game state is the specific game state. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved. For example, in the specific game state, it is possible to secure time to execute the effect, and in the case of not in the specific game state, the game can proceed quickly.

In addition, the first special result is that the probability of being derived can be changed according to the gaming state.
There are a special result and a second special result in which the probability of being derived regardless of the gaming state is constant, and the probability that the second special result is derived is higher than the probability that the first special result is derived. It will be done. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the lengths of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period different for the second special result that does not change the probability, the derivation probability does not change, but the execution mode can be changed.

FIG. 7 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer called an amusement chip (IC).
It includes a CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and D generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as C5V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates the DC voltage of DC32V from the AC power supply of 24V.
The power supply voltage is applied to the normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from the DC32V voltage and the internal RAM of the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure. Supply backup power supply unit 420
The game control device 100 is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the occurrence and recovery of a power failure.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100.
The data supplied to 1 (particularly the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power cutoff. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It includes M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the game machine 10
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). State that became identification information,
However, the special result mode may be set to the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It is getting higher in the order of premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the whole. Further, although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random generation to generate variation pattern random numbers for determining various reach and variation display game execution time in non-reach variation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the general clock variation display game. It is provided with a circuit and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of a random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, CPU111A
Is a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a start port 1 switch 36a in the first start winning opening 36, and a start port 2 in the second start winning opening 37. Switch 37a, winning opening switch 35a, a plurality of (1 to x, two in this embodiment) upper large winning opening switch 38a, second special variable winning device 39 arranged in the first special variable winning device 38. It is connected to the lower prize opening switch 39a and the gate switch 34a in the gate 34, and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input, and a positive logic of 0V-5V is input. Interface chip that converts to the signal of
Proximity I / F) 121 is provided. Proximity I / F121 has an input range of 7V-11V
By doing so, it is possible to detect abnormal conditions such as the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch being improperly shorted, the sensor or switch being disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire being cut and floating. It is possible and is configured to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F1
Of the outputs of 21, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, the lower winning opening switch 39a, and the gate switch 34
The detection signal of a is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has
The detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, the detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10, the detection signal of the game machine 10. The detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like is also input. In addition, a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration is provided in the game machine.
The detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is the main board 10.
It is also supplied from 0 to a test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37
The detection signal of a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided on the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is used for each port 122, 123, of the input unit 120.
Not supplied to 124. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, in the output unit 130, opening / closing data of the upper prize opening solenoid 38b, which is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the first special variable winning device 38, and the lower grand prize opening solenoid 39b, which opens the second special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the game machine 10, such as jackpot information, from the external information terminal plate 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the upper winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive). Circuit) 138a, batch display device output from the second driver 138b, fourth output port 136 that outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, and the fifth output port 137 that outputs the external information signal supplied to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. 4 drivers 138d are provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. Photocoupler 13
Reference numeral 9 denotes a game microcomputer 111, which is configured to be capable of both communication so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication with the inspection device 500. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37, the winning opening switch 35a, and the upper large winning opening switch The 38a, the lower prize opening switch 39a, and the gate switch 34a are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. (Hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used.
Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI314 that controls the sound output to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, the synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal INT from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is to be entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). .. The board decoration device 46 is provided with a point notification unit 73, a cumulative value notification unit 74, an expectation notification unit 75, and a notification during an advantageous period described later in which a player can acquire a large number of prize balls. The notification unit 72 to perform is also included.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 that drive and control a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15. The board directing device 44 (including the center case 40) is provided.
For example, a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls a variable display device 4 and a movable accessory that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. The glass frame 15
A frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) may be provided, and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. A function that detects the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the motor or the like. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Further, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V.
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as, DC 3.3V based on DC 5V
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC1.2V is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPSET signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, and the like are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the game machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In these control circuits, the starting port 1 switch 36 provided in the first starting winning opening 36
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from a, the random value for determining the jackpot of the special figure 1 variation display game is extracted and the first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The jackpot determination random value or the like in the first start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss or variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the second start winning opening 37, the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game is extracted and the second is stored in the RAM 111C. Memorize the start memory. The jackpot determination random value and the like in the second start memory are compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B.
Special Figure 2 Variable display Performs processing to determine the hit / miss and fluctuation pattern of the game. The second start memory can be generated only in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, and temporarily stores the information necessary for starting the special figure 2 variable display game. , Special Figure 2 The start of the variable display game is not suspended.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 30.
Output to 0. Then, an identification symbol (identification information) is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.
Is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the special figure variation display game for which the stop display is displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make a means.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the variation display device 4 and the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, and also displays the special result mode and the special game. Performs processing to generate a state. In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the upper winning opening solenoid 38b, so that the gaming ball can flow into the upper winning opening. Control to do. Alternatively, the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 is provided by the lower winning opening solenoid 39b.
Is opened, and control is performed to allow the inflow of game balls into the lower prize opening.

Then, the large winning opening is opened until either a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins the large winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. One round is to be released, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the low probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 13 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 9, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs. Stack pointer setting process (step X2)
I do. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and a predetermined register (for example, D) is specified.
The upper address of the RAM start address is set in the register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper rank is 00h.
Or 01h is taken, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6),
The process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122.
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the initialization switch 11
The operation of 2 can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the standby time has elapsed. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed.
First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step X8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step X9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X10;
N) returns to the determination (step X9) of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem when the power is turned on. ..

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, when no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and whether the timer value is 0 Is determined (step X12). If the timer value is non-zero (step X
12; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step X8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step X).
12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is given to RWM (read / write memory) that can read and write RAM, EEPROM, etc. (step X13), and off-data is output (output) to all output ports. (Set to the state where there is no) (step X14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15) and read first. However, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

When the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17), and it is normal. If (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X).
18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19).
Determine if the calculated checksum matches the checksum when the power is turned off (step X2)
0). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), step X21 in FIG.
And perform the processing when it recovers normally from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or
When it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17)
N or step X18; N), checksum is not normal (step X20; N)
If it is determined, the process proceeds to step X23 of FIG. 10 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step X21 of FIG. 10, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (
Step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

After that, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X22), and the step. Proceed to X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not being executed, the customer is waiting. Send the command of the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step X23), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are included. Clear the RAM area to 0 (step X24) and set the RAM access prohibited area to access prohibited (step X2).
5). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X2).
6). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of this embodiment, step X27
Then, the model specification command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the probability information command, and the RAM initialization command (display the customer waiting demo screen and R for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) with light and sound.
A plurality of commands such as (command for notifying AM initialization) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

In step X28, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that generates the timer interrupt signal and the random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
Performs the process of starting the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step X28, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X29). Specifically, the setting of the code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is set by the CPU 111.
Performed by A. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
As the initial value (start value) of the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number)) After saving in the area (step X30), the interrupt is permitted (step X31). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step X32) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. CTC output with the same cycle (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing)
It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on. Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

The number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus after the initial value random number update process in step X32.
Is set (step X33), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X3).
4). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the initial value random number update process (step X34; N)
Return to step X32). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X32) (step X31), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number update process in step X32 may be performed in the timer interrupt process as well. If such a method is adopted, both are initially used. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing.
This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35).
.. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X3).
5; N) returns to the determination (step X34) of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X36).
), The process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step X37) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X38).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X39).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X40) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X41) for saving the calculated checksum, the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X42), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, and The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 11 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19, X4) in the above-mentioned main process.
0) was shown. In this checksum calculation process, first, RW is used as the starting value of the calculated address.
The start address of M is set (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52).
, “0” is set as the calculated value (step X53). RA used for the number of repetitions
The number of bytes of M is set.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is used as a new calculated value (step X5).
4), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56), and it is determined whether the checksum calculation is completed (step X57). If the calculation is not completed (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 12 shows the initial value random number update process (step X32) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number update process is completed. Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol in the special symbol variation display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special symbol variation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and FIG. 13
Timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X1).
01). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, output processing (step X104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper prize winning opening solenoid 38b, lower winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step X105), the random number update process 1 (step X106), in which the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes are output to the payout control device 200.
Random number update process 2 (step X107) is performed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, and the lower winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring of errors. Winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108) to perform (whether the front frame or glass frame is open, etc.)
)I do.

Next, a start port switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are used based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37.
Is extracted. Then, the special figure 1 game process (step X110) for processing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 game process (step X111) for performing the special figure 2 variable display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) that checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and the panel radio error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. Monitoring process (step X1
14) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X115) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed to end the timer interrupt process.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step X103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121).
). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step X122), and the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step). X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X1).
24), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
Then, after preparing the unused bit data (step X126), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and the switch reading process (step X128) is performed.

After that, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X).
129), the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing the unused bit data (step X131), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), and the switch reading process (step X133) is performed.
End the input process.

In the present embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or another memory.
Further, as the information about the unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted, the information prepared corresponding to each input port is used.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps X128, X133) in the above-mentioned input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step X141). And 8
If there is an unused bit in the bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step X1).
42) After inverting the bits that need to be inverted (step X143), the bits are saved (stored) in the port input state 1 of the target switch control area (step X144). After that, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step X145).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step X146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step X147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is used. Save (store) in (step X149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 1 and the bits having different states are 0 in the first and second readings (step X150).
The logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken and used as the fixed bit this time (step X151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which bits having the same state as 0 and bits having different states as 1 in the first and second reads (step X152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt The product is taken and used as the last holding bit (step X153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit this time and the held bit last time are combined and saved as the fixed state this time (step X154), the exclusive OR of the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state this time is taken, and the save is saved as the rising edge (step X155). The switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read by reading the switch once for each interrupt process and comparing it with the result of the previous read to change the signal. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been executed, but if this is done, the correct determination may not be made if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step X104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 7) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50.
(Step X161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the upper prize-winning port solenoid 38b and the lower prize-winning port solenoid 39b is combined and output (step X162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
The output data of the digit line of (step X164) is acquired, and the acquired information and the external information data are combined (step X165). Then, the combined data is output to the digit output port 136 and the external information output port 137 (step X166). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X167), and the loaded data is loaded into the port 135 for segment output.
Is output to (step X168).

Then, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and synthesized (step X169).
), The combined data and the output data of the launch permission are combined (step X170), and the combined data is output to the port 137 for external information output (step X171). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step X172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the relay board 7 is combined.
The combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on 0 (step X175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X176) to end the output process.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prizes for which the payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information regarding the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals,
It is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is provided with a prize number counter area for each prize ball number set for each prize opening (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 15 prize balls). Therefore, the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted signals are sent. This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 2 (step X181), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, the prize number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not. Then, when there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step X183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X183; N), step X1
Return to 81 and repeat the above process.

If it is determined in step X181 that there is a count number (step X181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X18).
4) Acquire the number of payouts corresponding to the target winning number counter area (step X185). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the acquired number of payouts are added to obtain a new remaining number of prize balls (step X1).
86), save in the remaining number of prize balls area (step X187). As the value of the prize ball remaining number region before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 which is a predetermined number which is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the addition result (
Step X188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, since the subtracted result is not saved in the prize ball remaining number area, the value before subtraction is stored in the prize ball remaining number area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y)
Updates the value of the main prize ball signal output number region by +1 (step X190), saves the subtraction result in the prize ball remaining number region (step X191), and returns to step X188.

As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step X193).
If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y).
) Determines whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control, and if the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle state or payout that can immediately start payout control. Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an indefinite state in which the state is indefinite is set.

The indefinite state is set by clearing the busy signal flag area, for example, by processing when the power is turned on. This indefinite state is set to an idle state or a busy state based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be started. It will be solved with. That is, when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the continuous output of the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 without transmission. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

When the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. Here, even if the state is indefinite, it is determined that the user is busy. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

When the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195), among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls, the winning number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not.

Then, when there is no count in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and all the winning number counter areas are displayed. It is determined whether the check of the count number is completed (step X197). With this determination, all checks are completed (step X19).
7; If Y) is determined, the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and the above process is repeated.

Further, in step X195, when it is determined that there is a count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step). X198), the payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission process is completed. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and the initial value is, for example, 200 ms.
Is set.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. If so, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

Since the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200 in this way, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure and backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function to do so.

In a conventional game machine (for example, a game machine of JP-A-2000-321759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data to its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, conventional gaming machines require a backup function, so
There was a problem that it led to cost increase. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized even if the payout control device 200 does not have a function for backing up.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the prize ball is paid out by an external device such as a hall computer. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter that can store the information about the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter that can store the information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

Based on the above, the game is controlled comprehensively, and the winning areas provided in the game area 32 (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38). , The game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the second special variable prize device 39), and the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means.
A state in which a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling payout of a game ball is provided, and the game control means indicates whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. A state in which a prize ball command is transmitted to a payout control means based on a signal (busy signal), and when a power failure occurs and the player recovers from the power failure, the payout control means can start payout control. Even if the signal is output, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means is continuously output for a predetermined period. Correspondingly, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, in the game area 32, winning areas having different numbers of winning balls (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) are provided. A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) are provided, and a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted for each number of prize balls. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal is transmitted, and the identification of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control is performed before the identification of whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. You are trying to do it.

In addition, the game is controlled in a comprehensive manner, and the predetermined winning areas (first starting winning opening 36, second)
Starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 3
A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to 9).
) And a payout control means (payout control device 200) that controls payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means is output from the payout control means. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started.
External information that outputs a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the game control device 100) and the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. The external information output means includes an output means (game control device 100), and the state signal output from the payout control means is a prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. It means that the output of is performed.

Further, even if the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) indicates that the status signal can start the payout control when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can store information about the prize ball command and a prize that can store information about the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) and a prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) are provided in a predetermined winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35). , The first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39) is generated in units of one winning ball command, and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command is configured to be transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is provided with information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. Is memorable, and is updated when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, and is updated in correspondence with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means, so that the prize ball command that has not been transmitted is updated. The number of prize balls is memorable, and the external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area, and outputs the prize ball signal every time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is configured to be output to the outside of the game machine, and can store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and the winning ball is won in the predetermined winning area. By updating at times and updating in correspondence with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been cumulatively processed.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 18 shows a random number update process 1 (step X1) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13).
06) was shown. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).
When the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is supported. It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be used (step X223). After that, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. Also, when the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224).
Y) is a register that loads the small hit symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (step X225) and holds the start value of the random number counter (random number region) corresponding to the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number. (Start value setting register) is set (step X226), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 19 shows a random number update process 2 (step X1) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13).
07) was shown. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as variable pattern random numbers, and both of them are to be updated in the random number update process 2. Then, each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is the top 1.
It is configured to be executed for either bytes or the lower 1 byte.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the referenced table based on the calculated address (step X233). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment is loaded (step X234). Randomness can be added to random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 are used. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4-bit is illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number region (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). When the random number region is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter, this is used). (Called the masked value)
Set the mask update value by adding "1", and set the lower 1 byte to "0" (step X2).
37), the process proceeds to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set.
The byte is set to the above mask update value (step X238), and the process proceeds to step X239.
In addition, adding "1" to the masked value may result in the masked value being "0".
This is to avoid adding "0" later because it does not change from the value before adding.

Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239), and when it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number region to be updated is set (step X240). , Step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. ) Is set (step X2)
41), the process proceeds to step X242.

In step X242, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random number value is used as a new random number value, and it is determined whether or not the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step X233 (step). X243). Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; N), the new random number value is saved in the random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is used as the new random number value again (step X244), and this value is set to 1. Byte random number or 2
Save in the random number area lower than the byte random number (step X245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. In the case of a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step X247). )
, The random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A has a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the start region of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. It serves as a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 20 shows a winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the upper winning opening switches 38a in the upper winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step X301). , Even though the big winning opening is not open, the fraud & winning monitoring process (step X302) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.

In the winning opening monitoring table (fraud monitoring table), a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, and a fraudulent winning error Information on the notification command, the upper limit of the number of illegal winnings (the number of illegal winning judgments), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. Further, in the winning opening switch table, information on the number of times of monitoring (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter area 1 and the address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined. These fraud monitoring tables and winning tables are prepared according to each of the switches to be monitored.

After that, the other lower grand prize opening switch 39 in the lower grand prize opening (second special variable winning device 39)
The winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to a is prepared (step X303), and fraud & winning monitoring processing (step X304) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning is executed. Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table (here, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, winning opening switch 35a of general winning opening 35) that can always win a prize (step X305), and the number of winnings. Winning number counter update process (step X30)
6) is performed. Then, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process for monitoring the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state scheduled to be executed mainly for the special figure 1 variable display game is performed (step X307).

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and the signals whose status should be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step X308). This status scan counter is updated in the range 0-3. afterwards,
The game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X309). Then, a game machine state check process (step X310) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like. When the value of the status scan counter is set to 1, monitoring of the status based on the shoot-out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

Next, the game machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X311). Then, a game machine state check process (step X312) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring to the value of the state scan counter in the game machine state monitoring table 2, if the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, and the state scan is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is 0 (step X313), and if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X313; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the game machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X313; Y), the game machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X314), and the game machine status check for determining the status such as whether an error has occurred is determined. The process (step X315) is performed.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 3, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like. Set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counters are 1 to 3.

After that, the payout busy signal check process (step X316) for setting the busy signal flag based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. To do. In addition, steps X314 to X316
Is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that the process is executed once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps X314 to X316 are performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 21 shows fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps X302, X304) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. This fraud & prize monitoring process is a process performed on each of the two upper prize opening switches 38a of the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower grand prize opening switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39. Large prize opening (special variable prize equipment 38, 39
) Is likely to be fraudulent by forcibly opening the open / close door, inserting a game ball, and paying out the prize ball.

In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error-monitored is checked (step X321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step X321).
Step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the upper large winning opening switch 38a, and the winning opening to be error-monitored. When the switch is the lower large winning opening switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step X323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X3).
32). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target fraudulent winning number is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of fraudulent winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example). It is determined whether or not the number exceeds (5) (step X325).

The reason why the number of judgments is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is sandwiched between the door members of the large winning opening, and the game ball is the valid period of the large winning opening switch. This is to prevent it from being judged as invalid when a prize is won after passing the above or when there is noise in the signal, and it is not easily judged as an error even though it is not illegal.

Then, when the number of determined items is not exceeded (step X325; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). If the number of determined items is exceeded (step X325; Y), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegally generated determinations (step X32).
6) Save the initial value (for example, 60,000 ms) in the target illegal prize notification timer area (for example, 60000 ms).
Step X327). Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step X328), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330), and the winning number counter update process (step X331) for setting the winning ball is performed. .. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted is determined (step X333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraudulent & winning monitoring process is terminated. When the update of the notification timer is permitted (step X333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, the notification timer is updated by -1 (step X334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

To update the notification timer, the winning opening switch for error monitoring is one of the upper winning opening switches 3
If it is 8a, it is permitted, and if the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the other upper winning opening switch 38a, it is not permitted. As a result, regarding the fraudulent notification of the first special variable winning device 38, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently, and the specified time (for example, 6) is updated.
It prevents the time from being up by half of (0000ms). When the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the lower winning opening switch 39a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335), and if the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the target illegal release command is prepared (step X336), and the illegal prize release flag is set as the illegal flag. Prepare (step X337)
). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).
..

When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of fraudulent winnings is cleared (step X338; Y). Step X339), the prepared rogue flag is compared with the value of the target rogue flag area (step X339).
Step X340). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X3).
38; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340).

Then, when the prepared fraudulent flag and the value of the target fraudulent flag area match (step X).
340; Y) ends the fraud & winning monitoring process. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step X340; N), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step X341), and the effect command setting process is performed. (
Step X342), end the fraud & winning monitoring process. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
FIG. 22 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps X306, X331) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening switch table of the winning opening monitoring table (step X351), and is input to the target winning opening switch (to be exact, the input is changed). ) Is present (step X352).

When there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches is completed (step X362). If there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether or not the overflow occurs (step X354). Step X355). Then, when overflow does not occur (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X356).
Step X357). When an overflow occurs (step X355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357).

After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether or not it overflows (step X35).
9). If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361). ), It is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362). If an overflow occurs (step X3)
59; Y) updates the table address to the address of the next record (step X36).
1), it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step X362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the target winning opening switch has an input (step X352). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362; Y), the winning number counter update process is completed.
By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting process]
FIG. 23 shows the effect command setting process (step X342) in the above-mentioned fraud & prize monitoring process.
)showed that. Note that this effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371).
, Determine if the transmit buffer is full (step X372).

If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), the command data (step X372; N)
Write MODE (upper byte) to the production serial transmission buffer (step X373)
), The status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

If the transmit buffer is full (step X375; Y), the process returns to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), the command data (step X375; N)
Write ACTION (lower byte) to the production serial transmission buffer (step X3)
76), the effect command setting process is terminated.

As described above, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the command can be made difficult. In addition, the command transmission timing can be accelerated and the number of data lines can be reduced. Further, the effect control device 300 does not need to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special Figure 2 Abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing]
FIG. 24 shows the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring process (
Step X307) is shown. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state which is a low probability state, but the player who does not know this is advantageous. Alternatively, it is conceivable that a player who intentionally aims to execute the special figure 2 variable display game makes a right-handed strike. In the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process, a process is performed to notify such a player to perform a left-handed strike.

The abnormal fluctuation here means an irregular fluctuation, which is a non-main special figure fluctuation display game. Since it is possible to win a prize in the second start winning opening 37 even in the normal game state, it is a legitimate special figure fluctuation display game even if it is irregular fluctuation, and it is a game ball with a thread, the use of a magnet, and radio waves. It is different from the fraudulent act of executing a special figure variation display game by illegally detecting a prize by launching a magnet. However, it is not preferable that the special figure fluctuation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design of the game machine, continues to be executed. Here, such irregular fluctuations are detected. The number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is counted, and when the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 reaches a specified value, the corresponding processing is performed. Of course, even if you execute a special figure 2 fluctuation display game that causes irregular fluctuations by illegally detecting a prize at the second start winning opening 37 by using a game ball or magnet with a thread attached, emitting radio waves, etc. 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations is counted. That is, regardless of whether or not it is a fraudulent act, the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations is counted when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is irregular fluctuation is executed.

In this special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 change check flag (step X381). The special figure 1 check flag is a flag set when the special figure 1 variable display game is started in a low probability state. When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is not present (step X381; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present (step X387). In addition, when there is a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381; Y),
The special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X382), and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (step X383).

Then, it is determined whether the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is smaller than the specified value (for example, 18) (step X3).
84) If it is smaller than the specified value (step X384; Y), it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387). If it is larger than the specified value (step X384; N), the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations added by executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state (low probability state) must be 0. Update -1 (step X385),
The special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X386), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present (step X387). The minimum value of the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is set to 0.

The special figure 2 check flag is a flag set when the special figure 2 variable display game is started in a low probability state. Determining whether or not there is this special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387)
), In the case where there is no special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387; N), step X
Move to 390. If there is a special figure 2 check flag (step X387; Y), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X388), and the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations is increased by +1.
It is updated (step X389), and it is determined whether the number of abnormal fluctuations in FIG. 2 is smaller than the specified value (for example, 5) (step X390).

That is, special figure 2 which is a fluctuation display game (irregular fluctuation) that is not the main in a low probability state.
A special figure 2 check flag is set based on the start of the variable display game, and this special figure 2
Based on the setting of the check flag, the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2, which is the number of abnormal judgments, is updated (added here) in the direction in which the abnormality occurs. In addition, the number of abnormalities released is updated (added here) based on the start of the main fluctuation display game (main fluctuation), and the number of abnormalities judged based on the number of abnormalities released satisfying a predetermined condition. Special figure 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations is updated (subtracted here) in the direction of canceling the abnormality. Therefore, the game control device 100 serves as an abnormality determination number management means for updating the abnormality determination number in the abnormality occurrence direction based on the start of the non-main variable display game.

Special figure 2 When the number of abnormal fluctuations is not smaller than the specified value (step X390; N), special figure 2
The number of abnormal fluctuations is set to the specified value -1 (step X391), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is set in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer (step X392). Next, the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag is prepared (step X393), the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence command is prepared (step X394), and the process proceeds to step X399. In this case, although it is a normal game state (low probability state) in which it is recommended to hit left and proceed with the game mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game, the player hits right and special. FIG. 2 This is a case where the variable display game is being executed, and processing is performed to notify the player to make a left-handed strike.

On the other hand, when the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation notification timer is updated by -1 (step X395), and it is determined whether the time is up (step X396). ). If the time is not up (step X396; N), the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. Also, when the time is up (step X396; Y
) Prepares the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag (step X397) and prepares the special figure 2 abnormal change release command (step X398).

After that, it is determined whether the prepared flag is the same as the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step X399). Then, when the prepared flag and the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area are the same (step X399; Y), that is, when there is no change in the state,
Special figure 2 The abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the prepared flag and the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal change flag area are not the same (step X399; N), that is, when there is a change in the state, the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag. (Step X4)
00).

If the prepared flag is not the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag (step X400; N), that is, if it is the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (step). X402), the effect command setting process is performed, and the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag (
In step X400; Y), after clearing the number of abnormal fluctuations in FIG. 2 to 0 (step X401).
, Steps X402 and X403 are performed (step X403), and the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process is completed. By the above processing, the special figure 2 abnormal change generation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the special figure 2 abnormal change is detected, and the special figure 2 abnormal change release command is sent to the effect control device 300 when the special figure 2 abnormal change is released. It is transmitted to 300, and the start and end of the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation notification are set.

25 and 26 show an example of processing by the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process accompanying the progress of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 25, the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is 3 and the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is 15 in the normal gaming state. When the next special figure 1 variation display game is started from this state (t11), the number of changes in special figure 1 changes from 15 to 16. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is started (t12), the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations changes from 3 to 4.

After that, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the special figure 1 variation number is updated by +1 (t1).
3, t14). Here, when the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 reaches the specified value of 18 (t14), Special Figure 2
The number of abnormal fluctuations is updated by -1 and changes from 4 to 3, and the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is cleared to 0. Similarly, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the special figure 1 variation number is updated by +1 (t15 to t17), and when the special figure 1 variation number reaches the specified value of 18 (t17), The number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is updated by -1 and changes from 3 to 2, and the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is cleared to 0. That is, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is subtracted every time the specified number (here, 18 times) of the special figure 1 variation display game is executed.

FIG. 26 shows a case where the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation notification is performed. In this example, in the normal gaming state, the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is 3. When the special figure 2 variation display game is started from this state (t21), the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations is updated from 3 to 4. Furthermore, special figure 2
When the fluctuation display game is started (t22), the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 reaches the specified value of 5.

As a result, the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag is saved, and based on this flag, the output of the external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred and the game machine error status signal to the device outside the game machine is started. It becomes possible to grasp the occurrence of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation with a management device of a game store or the like. In addition, a special figure 2 abnormality change generation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Production control device 300
Then, based on the reception of this command, a notification indicating that an abnormal change has occurred in Special Figure 2 is performed by display, voice, or the like. That is, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 form a response means for taking a predetermined response based on the abnormality determination number (special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation number) satisfying a predetermined condition (a specified value).

Further, when the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 reaches the specified value of 5, the time counting by the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is started (t22), and the predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses (60 seconds in this case). t
23), special figure 2 clears the number of abnormal fluctuations to 0, and stops the output of external information and the game machine error status signal. Further, a special figure 2 abnormal change release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 ends the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred based on the reception of this command.

The number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is set to the specified value -1 (4 in this case) after reaching the specified value (5 in this case) and determining that the abnormal variation in Special Figure 2 has occurred. Therefore, if the special figure 2 variation display game is newly started before the elapse of the predetermined time, the special figure 2 variation number becomes the specified value, and the time counting of the predetermined time is newly started from that point. As a result, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed even though the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal variation has occurred is performed, the notification period is extended accordingly.

In this way, by determining that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the fact that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches the specified value (for example, 5), for example, the game ball is unintentionally entered into the game area on the right side. Therefore, when a prize is won in the second start winning opening 37, it is possible to prevent it from being immediately determined to be an abnormal change in FIG. Furthermore, by playing the special figure 1 variation display game a predetermined number of times, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is subtracted, so that the special figure 2 abnormal variation generated for the unintended winning of the second starting winning opening 37 The number will be resolved if the game is played after that, and it is possible to prevent a mere mistake or the result of another player's game from accumulating and being determined to be a special figure 2 abnormal variation.

It should be noted that the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number for which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed and the specified value for the special figure 1 abnormal fluctuation number for which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is subtracted are arbitrary. It can be set.
Each of the specified values set here may be any value as long as it can prevent the player from aiming at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state. If a power failure occurs and the system recovers, monitoring should be resumed from the state before the power failure. In addition, even when the special figure 2 abnormality change notification is performed, the prize balls are paid out as usual for the prize.

[Game machine status check process]
FIG. 27 shows a game machine state check process (game machine state check process) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process.
Steps X310, X312, X315) are shown. In this game machine status check process,
First, the status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is acquired (step X451).
, It is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

Information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined in the status monitoring table. This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the state monitoring area, the lower address of the port input state area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, the mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, and the signal. On judgment data, status off command (in the case of an error system, an error notification end command is issued), status on command (in the case of an error system, an error notification start command is issued), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer Includes comparison values.

When the target signal is not on (step X452: N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step X453), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step X454). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X4).
55), the value of the target signal control region is compared with the state of the current signal (step X459).
When the target signal is not on (step X452: N), it is a state indicating that the error type signal is not an error (normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step X452: Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step X456), and the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step X457). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X45).
9). When the target signal is on (step X452: Y), it means that the error type signal is an error (abnormal or invalid), and the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is a state showing.

When the value of the target signal control area and the state of the current signal match (step X459; Y)
That is, if the signal status has not changed, the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (
Step X462), it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). Further, when the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state do not match (step X459; N), that is, when the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area (step X459; N). Step X460). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or higher than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X461). Step X463).

When the value of the target status monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N
) Ends the game machine status check process. When the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step X464). The state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step X465).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step X465; Y), the game machine state check process ends. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X467), the game machine state check process is completed. As a result, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 28 shows the payout busy signal check process (step X316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first
It is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), the idle state flag is prepared as the state flag (step X472), and the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 3) is prepared.
2ms) is set (step X473). When the payout busy signal is on (step X471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X4).
74), set the on-determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) (step X475).
..

After that, it is determined whether the value in the busy signal state region is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, whether there is a change of on or off (step X476), and if they are the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). Also,
If they are not the same (step X476; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step X477), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X47).
8), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the previously set on-determination monitoring timer comparison value or off-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value, that is, whether the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step). X480).
If the signal confirmation time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check process ends. When the signal confirmation time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1, and the previously set on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or off-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value of -1 is obtained. (Step X481), the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step X482), and the payout busy signal check process ends.

By this process, the busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time,
Even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues for the signal confirmation time. It is difficult to receive.

Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and the state becomes indefinite until one of the signal states continues for the signal confirmation time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the device recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200 even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is issued to the payout control device 200 in response to a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200, which is not transmitted to the payout control device 200. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the start port switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process.
The details of. As shown in FIG. 29, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (first start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information with a start opening prize that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X493).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the probability is low (step X494). Then, when the probability is low (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. If the probability is not low (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X496). After that, a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure start port 1 switch process is performed (step X498).

Based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs a right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform a right-handed hit by display, voice, or the like. Right-handed is more advantageous for the player when in a high-probability state, and when a prize is detected in the high-probability state at the first starting winning opening 36, which is designed to win only if left-handed. Right-handed instruction notification is performed.

Next, the starting port 2 (second starting winning opening 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X499).
), A hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X500), and it is determined whether or not there is start opening winning information that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501).

If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the start opening winning information is set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step X502). Then, when the probability is high (step X502; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. Further, when the probability is not high (step X502; N), it is determined whether the player is in the big hit, that is, in the first special game state which is the special game state based on the big hit (step X503).

If the jackpot is in progress (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If the jackpot is not hit (step X503; N), prepare a left-handed instruction notification command (step X503; N).
Step X505), the effect command setting process is performed (step X506). After that, a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X507), and the special figure start port 2 is prepared.
The switch process is performed (step X508), and the start port switch monitoring process is completed.

Based on the reception of the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs left-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform left-handed movement by display, voice, or the like. Left-handed is more advantageous for the player when in a low-probability state, and when a prize is detected in the low-probability state at the second starting winning opening 37, which is designed to win only when right-handed. I am trying to give a left-handed instruction notification. In the first special gaming state, the first special variable winning device 3
Since 8 is released, the left-handed instruction notification is not performed even in a low probability state.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
FIG. 30 shows a hard random number acquisition process (step X) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process.
492, X500) was shown. In this hard random number acquisition process, first, information on no start opening prize is set (step X511), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (step X).
512).

If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. When the target switch has an input (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step X514).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step X515). Then, the start opening winning information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 31 shows a special figure start port 1 switch process (step X498) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 1 switch processing, first, the first start winning opening 3
The start port signal 1 output number of times, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times of winning a prize in 6 is output to the external management device of the game machine 10, is loaded (step X521), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522). ), Determine whether the number of outputs overflows (step X523)
). Then, when the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 1 output count area of the RWM (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number). Is less than the upper limit value (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525.
Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is not saved after the update because it loops due to +1 update and becomes 0.

When the number of special figure 1 hold is less than the upper limit value (4 in this case) (step X525; Y), the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process described later is set (step X525; Y). Step X526), the number of special figures 1 held is updated by +1 (step X527).
). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step X528), and the jackpot random number prepared by the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is RW.
Save in the jackpot random number storage area of M (step X529).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Furthermore, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and R
Save in the small hit symbol random number storage area of WM (step X532). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, the special figure hold information determination process (step X), which is the look-ahead process,
534) is performed, the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step X535), the effect command setting process is performed (step X536), and the special figure start port 1 switch process is completed. .. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) can extract a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36, and can store the predetermined random number as the first starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. It serves as the first start storage means.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
FIG. 32 shows the special figure hold information determination process (step X534) in the above-mentioned special figure start port 1 switch process. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory. In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability state (step X541), and if it is in the high probability state (step X541; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. .. Also, when not in the high probability state (step X541; N)
) Is in the jackpot, that is, in the first special gaming state which is the special gaming state based on the jackpot (step X542).

If the jackpot is in progress (step X542; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.
Further, when the jackpot is not in progress (step X542; N), the jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step X).
543). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). A look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X544; N).
Step X547). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), the stop symbol information of the small hit is set (step X549), and the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), the out-of-order stop symbol information is set (step X550), and the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

After preparing the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551),
The effect command setting process is performed (step X552). Next, the special figure 1 information setting process (step X553) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Process (step X554).

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step X556), and end the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process in step X554 are the processes executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the special figure 1 normal processing. Is similar to.

By the above processing, the look-ahead stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory and the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory are included. A look-ahead variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is changed to the special figure 1 variation based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory. It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the display game, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game is started. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the timing.

That is, the game control device 100 may determine the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the first variation display game based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means. Make a possible first decision. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment such as) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time for determining the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start winning prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

Note that this special figure hold information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game that does not generate a start memory for holding the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done. In addition, the look-ahead processing is not performed when the probability is high.
This is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is the main body during the high probability state, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly removed by deriving a special result in this special figure 2 variable display game. This is because it is almost always stopped at. In other words, since most of them are out of order, there is not much meaning in notifying the look-ahead result, and after notifying the look-ahead result that is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is forcibly changed to the out-of-reading result. This is because the contradiction may occur.

However, since the start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated for the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 change while there is the first start memory during the first period of the specific game state. There is a high possibility that only the display game is played, and in such a case, the look-ahead effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first start memory that performs such a look-ahead effect, the one that occurs before the start of the specific game state is pre-reading, so the result is used, and the one that occurs after the start of the specific game state is used. , The pre-reading process is performed on the object of such pre-reading effect. Of course, the look-ahead process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and it may be determined whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect based on the result of the look-ahead process in another process.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 33 shows a special figure start port 2 switch process (step X508) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 2 switch processing, first, the second start winning opening 3
The start port signal 2 output number of times, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times of winning a prize in 7 is output to the external management device of the game machine 10, is loaded (step X561), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X562). ), Determine whether the number of outputs overflows (step X563)
). Then, when the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 2 output count area of the RWM (step X564), and the start port 2 (step X564) is saved.
2nd start winning opening 37) It is determined whether or not the winning is invalid.

Starting port 2 When the prize is invalid means that the special figure 1 variable display game that has a special result (big hit or small hit) is stopped (during special figure display processing, which will be described later), during the first or second special game state, and Special Figure 2 The variable display game is being executed. When this starting port 2 winning is invalid (step X565; Y)
Ends the special figure start port 2 switch processing. If the starting port 2 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), the number of special figures 2 held is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). ), The jackpot random number prepared in the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure start port 2 switch processing is completed. That is, the game control device 100
However, it serves as a start winning prize storage means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the second start winning opening 37. Since there are few types of fluctuation patterns in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is not used.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 34 shows a special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process.
showed that. Special Figure 1 Variable display Controls the entire process related to the game and sets the display of Special Figure 1.
In this special figure 1 game processing, first, during the big hit / small hit of special figure 2, that is, during the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. (Step Y101).

When the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, the game is updated by -1 (step Y103). ). In addition, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress (step Y1).
01; Y) shifts to step Y103.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the upper large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Performs processing to monitor detection. In the special figure 1 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). Special Figure 1 If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119, and subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The game sequence branch table referred to in FIG. 1 is set in the register (step Y105). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is acquired (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y107).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game are set. Figure 1
Setting information required to perform processing during fluctuations Special Figure 1 Normal processing (step Y108)
I do. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure 1 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display processing, and the like. 1 Perform the variable processing (step Y109).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type is set. Set the fanfare time according to the opening pattern of the big prize opening, set the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, etc. Special Figure 1 Displaying processing (
Step Y110) is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Performs fanfare / interval processing (step Y111). In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y112) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, a process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or
Special figure 1 The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108). I do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. Processing during small hit fanfare (step Y1) to set necessary information for
15) is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y116) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", the process of setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. The small hit residual sphere processing (step Y117) for setting the information necessary for performing the processing is performed.
In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (
Step Y119), the symbol variation control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed, and the special figure 1 game process is completed. This special figure 1 game process performs a process of performing a series of execution control related to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure 2 game processing (step X111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing.
showed that. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. This special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, during the big hit / small hit of special figure 1, that is, during the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. (Step Y131). Then, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y13).
2) If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, the game is updated by -1 (step Y133). Further, in the case of a big hit / small hit in FIG. 1 (step Y131; Y), step Y133
Move to.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the upper large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Performs processing to monitor detection. In the special figure 2 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). Special Figure 2 If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152, and subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, is the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer 0? Is determined (step Y135).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N)
Updates the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1 (step Y150), and special figure 2
The timer value for length variation (60,000 ms in this case) is saved in the game processing timer area (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal gaming state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the initial value of the timer. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is measured for the specified time (here, 60,000 ms).

Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y),
The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (step Y136). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired (step Y137).
), Make a subroutine call based on the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y138).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game are set. Figure 2
Special Figure 2 Normal processing (step Y139) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations
I do. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step Y140).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type is set. Setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern of the big winning opening, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, etc. Special Figure 2 Displaying processing (
Step Y141) is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y142). In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y143) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, a process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or
Special figure 2 The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y144) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", the special figure 2 jackpot end processing (step Y145) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. Processing during small hit fanfare (step Y1) to set necessary information for
46) is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y147) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the process of setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. The small hit residual sphere processing (step Y148) for setting the information necessary for performing the processing is performed.
In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (
Step Y152), the symbol variation control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the special figure 2 game process is completed. This special figure 2 game process performs a process of performing a series of execution control related to the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel in.

[Great winning opening switch monitoring process]
FIG. 36 shows the big winning opening switch monitoring process (steps Y102, Y132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (step Y159). Then, when the upper prize opening is open (step Y159; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. In addition, when the upper prize opening is not open (step Y159;
N) determines whether or not the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is being processed (step Y160). The remaining ball processing in this determination includes both the large winning opening remaining ball processing based on the big hit and the small hit remaining ball processing based on the small hit.

If the remaining balls of the upper prize opening are being processed (step Y160; Y), step Y166
Move to. In addition, when the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is not in progress (step Y160; N),
It is determined whether the lower prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) is open (step Y16).
1). Then, when the lower prize opening is not open (step Y161; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the lower prize opening is open (step Y161;
Y) determines whether or not there is an input to the lower prize opening switch (step Y162).

The opening in steps Y159 and Y161 means the opening in the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the first special result (big hit), and the special gaming state based on the second special result (small hit). Includes both during opening in the second special gaming state. Also, step Y1
In the determination of 59 to Y161, the determination may be made by referring to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 game processing number, or a flag indicating whether or not each state is set may be set in this flag. It may be judged based on.

If there is no input to the lower prize opening switch (step Y162; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. Also, when there is an input to the lower prize opening switch (step Y162;
Y) sets 1 in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening added in the current large winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y163), and performs the production by winning the large winning opening. The count command is prepared (step Y164), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y165), and the process proceeds to step Y175. If there is a remaining ball processing for the lower prize opening, the large winning opening count command should be transmitted to the effect control device 300 even if there is an input to the lower prize opening switch during the remaining ball processing. You can do it.

On the other hand, in step Y166, the transition to the case where the upper prize opening is open (step Y161; Y) or the case where the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is being processed (step Y162; Y) is performed.
Set 0 to the winning counter (step Y166). After that, the upper prize opening switch 1 (
It is determined whether or not there is an input in one of the upper prize opening switches 38a) (step Y167), and if there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y171.

Further, when there is an input to the upper prize opening switch 1 (step Y167; Y), the grand prize opening count command is prepared (step Y168) to perform the effect by winning, and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y169). ). Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper winning opening switch 2 (the other upper winning opening switch 38a) (step Y171).

Then, when there is no input to the upper prize opening switch 2 (step Y171; N), the process proceeds to step Y175. In addition, when there is an input to the upper prize opening switch 2 (step Y17).
1; Y) prepares a large winning opening count command (step Y172) and performs an effect command setting process (step Y173) in order to perform an effect by winning. Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y174), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

After that, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step Y176; Y), or when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step Y177; Y). If any of the above, the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also,
The value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y175; N), and the remaining ball of the big winning opening is not being processed (step Y175; N).
If step Y176; N) and the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step Y177; N), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of large winning openings (step Y178), and the number of large winning openings is the upper limit (1). (Step Y179), it is determined whether or not the number of game balls that can be won in the round of

When the number of large winning openings is not equal to or higher than the upper limit (9 in this case) (step Y17)
9; N) ends the large winning opening switch monitoring process. Further, when the number of large winning openings is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step Y180), and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (Step Y181
). Then, it is determined whether the opening in the big hit, that is, the opening in the first special gaming state which is the special gaming state based on the big hit (step Y182).

If the jackpot is not open (step Y182; N), that is, if the jackpot is open, the jackpot switch monitoring process ends. Further, when the jackpot is being opened (step Y182; Y), the value of the jackpot opening operation end is saved in the jackpot opening control pointer area (step Y183), and the jackpot switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Special figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. In addition, although it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 1 is in a state where the normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 1 is not capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 normal processing is ended. Further, when the special figure 1 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been notified, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), step Y
Move to 206. If the left-handed instruction has not been notified (step Y202; N),
Prepare the left-handed instruction notification command (step Y203), and perform the effect command setting process (step Y203).
Step Y204). After that, the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is set.
It is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is
When the special game state based on the first special result, which is the fifth time counting from the derivation of the first special result in the low probability state, ends, that is, when the advantageous period in which the player can obtain a large number of prize balls ends. It is supposed to be cleared, and as a result, the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state in which the special figure variation display game is executed in the low probability state.

Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), step Y217 is performed.
Move to. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y208). After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for setting the information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y210), and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y211). , Perform the effect command setting process (step Y212). The process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (step Y21).
At the time of performing 0), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the hold corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number -1 from the current special figure 1 hold number is performed. I'm preparing a few commands.

Next, the special figure 1 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y21).
2). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and is 0 to 5.
Is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special game state which is a special game state based on the jackpot. The special figure status 5 indicates that the game is in the second special game state, which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not the state is in a high probability state (step Y213). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step Y213; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If it is not in the high probability state (step Y213; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y213; N).
Step Y215). That is, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y139) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. In addition, although it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 is not capable of starting fluctuation (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal processing is ended. Further, when the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222). In addition, as mentioned above, special figure 2 hold (second
(Starting memory) is temporarily used to start the special figure 2 variable display game based on the winning when the second starting winning opening 37 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. It is not intended to hold the start of the special figure variation display game as in the first start memory.

Then, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y224). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process for setting the information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 changing is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not the state is in a high probability state (step Y227). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step Y227; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. If it is not in the high probability state (step Y227; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y227; N).
Step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step Y231). Then, when the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233), and when it has not been disclosed (step Y233; N), it is in the customer waiting state. Performs processing related to settings. Further, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y23).
1; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232; Y) or when the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233; Y), the process proceeds to step Y237.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demo flag area is set (step Y234), the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235), and the effect is produced. The command setting process is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the game state information, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate effect. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change in the game state is transmitted. You will be able to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). As a result, the effect control device 30
At 0, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game starts, even if the effect control device 300 is restarted, the effect according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. This makes it possible to return to the effect according to the game state faster than waiting for the probability information command based on the change in the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the effect control device 300 to return to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process.
showed that. This special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. First, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of alignment information. , The big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information).
After performing 243), the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y244) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and various various settings related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game are performed. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step Y245).

After that, in the special figure 1 variation display game, a variation pattern, which is a variation mode in the game, is set.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y246) is performed, and the variation start information setting process (step Y247) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. By these processes, the result and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed are determined. Then, after this, a process for adjusting so as not to cause an inconvenience between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed at the same time is performed.

The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived, the other is forcibly removed regardless of the lottery result. As a result, it ends. In particular, since there is a high probability that the special figure 2 variable display game will be a small hit, if the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first, there is a high possibility that such processing will be performed for the special figure 1 variable display game. .. Therefore, for example, even though the special figure 1 variable display game is producing a highly expected effect, the game is forcibly stopped due to a loss result, and the player feels distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will end before the end of the special figure 1 variable display game that is about to start, the effect with high expectation may not be selected, or the special figure 2 variable may be selected. When a special result of a big hit is derived in a display game, it is possible to take measures such as making it possible to set a specific execution mode for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game executed by the variable display device 4.

For this purpose, first, it is determined whether or not the state is in the high probability state (step Y248), and when the state is in the high probability state (step Y248; Y), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated. In the case of a high probability state, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game. In this state, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and the game is executed frequently, it is known that there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game will be forcibly stopped as a result of disconnection. , Special figure 1
In the variable display game, since it is set in advance so that the effect with high expectation is not selected, no special processing is performed here.

Further, when it is not in the high probability state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249). When special figure 2 is not changing (step Y249; N)
Ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this case, the probability is low, so from now on, special figure 2
Even if the variable display game is started, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is a very long variable time. Therefore, since it is unlikely that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped, no processing is performed here to prevent a highly expected effect from being selected.

When the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249; Y), it is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is out of order (step Y250), and when it is out of order (step Y250; Y). ) Ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this case, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped. Further, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is not out of alignment (step Y250; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. Further, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y)
Ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this case, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier. Therefore, in order to prevent the production with high expectation from being selected. No processing is performed.

Further, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252).
In (N), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated (step Y253), and is the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game? Is determined (step Y254). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed from now on is less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; Y)
Ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier, no processing is performed to prevent a highly expected effect from being selected.

Further, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; N), it is notified that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer. A command is prepared (step Y255), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y256), and the special figure 1 variation start process is completed. This command also includes information on whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. Production control device 3
In 00, based on receiving a command notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 is longer, the selection of the highly expected effect for the special figure 1 variation display game is restricted or a specific execution mode is set. It is designed to perform processing such as doing.

When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y254; N)
Information on the fluctuation pattern set in step Y246) (first and second half fluctuation pattern numbers, etc.)
May be performed to reset the effect so that the effect control device 300 does not select the effect with high expectation. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern,
The fluctuation time may not be changed or may be changed. Further, the process of preparing the command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer (step Y255) may or may not be performed.

That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern processing (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100.
) Indicates the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information of the second variation display game when determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal gaming state. It serves as a first variation mode determining means capable of determining. Further, the process of resetting the above variation pattern performed by the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determining means, the second variation display game. Is being executed, the fluctuation time included in the fluctuation mode information of the second fluctuation display game is referred to, and information on the fluctuation pattern is obtained without changing the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display game that has been determined. It serves as a second variation mode determining means that can be redetermined.

Further, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246)
When determining the fluctuation pattern in, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y25).
4) may be performed to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the game situation from the beginning.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process.
showed that. This special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. First, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is out of alignment information. , The big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information).
After performing 263), the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y264) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and various various settings related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step Y265).

After that, in the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the game, is set.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y266) is performed, the variation start information setting process (step Y267) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 that can be executed at the same time
No processing is performed to adjust so that inconvenience does not occur between variable display games. is this,
This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, so that the special figure 2 variable display game is less likely to be forcibly ended with a missed result. However, as in the case of the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game is forcibly stopped due to a loss result, the selection of a highly expected effect may be restricted.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 41 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
242) was shown. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared (step Y273) from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y275), and when it is a jackpot (step Y275; Y).
) Goes to step Y279. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is a jackpot (step Y277; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y279) for determining the above is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y271. (Step Y281), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the large hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
262) was shown. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area of RWM (step Y293), and the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area is cleared to 0.

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y295), and when it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y).
) Goes to step Y299. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y299) for determining the above is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. (Step Y301), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the large hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 43 shows the jackpot determination processing (steps Y276, Y296) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot judgment process, first
The lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, when it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed. Also, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312).
N) determines whether the state is in a high probability state (step Y313).

Then, in the case of the high probability state (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ). If the probability is not high (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ..

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. Also, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316).
N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as a determination result (step Y31).
8), the jackpot determination process is completed.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 44 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279, Y299) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit judgment process, first
It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or more than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Moreover, the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value do not overlap.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y),
That is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the determination is for the special figure 1 variation display game. (Step Y322).

Then, when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). Also, when the information in Special Figure 1 is not being set (
In the case of step Y322; N), that is, the determination regarding the special figure 2 variable display game,
A small hit upper limit determination value for special figure 2 is set (step Y324), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y327), and the small hit determination process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 45 shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
243) is shown. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1
Load the jackpot symbol random number from the jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) (step Y3)
32). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y333).
Step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y335).
Step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 1 display 51).
This is for setting the stop symbol at the display device 41 and the stop symbol at the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y337), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 1
Save in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y338). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and when it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol Load the small hit symbol random number from the random number storage area (for 1 hold number) (step Y)
340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and the decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y).
346).

If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the missed stop symbol pattern is stopped in special figure 1. Save in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and prepare the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure 1 command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y347).
), The effect command setting process (step Y348) is performed. This decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350), and the special figure The 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 46 shows a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
263) was shown. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step Y361), and when it is a jackpot (step Y).
361; Y) loads the jackpot symbol random number from the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y365).
Step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 2 display 52).
This is for setting the stop symbol at the display device 41 and the stop symbol at the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (step Y367), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 2
Save in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y368). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369), and when it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y3).
72). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373).
A decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y374), and the missed stop symbol pattern is stopped in special figure 2. Save in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and prepare the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure 2 command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y377).
), The effect command setting process (step Y378) is performed. This decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 47 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
4) was shown. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y401). When the probability is not high (step Y401; N), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y402), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y403). , Special figure 1 big hit,
That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a jackpot stop symbol pattern (step Y404).

In the case of a special figure 1 big hit (step Y404; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412.
If it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y404; N), it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a small hit stop symbol pattern (step Y40).
5). Then, if it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y405; N), that is, if it is out of order, the process proceeds to step Y407. In addition, when it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y4)
05; Y) updates the value by adding the special figure 1 hold number to the latter half offset data (step Y).
406), add the special figure 1 hold number to the first half offset data and convert the value (step Y4).
07), the process proceeds to step Y412.

On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y401; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y408). And when it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; N)
Sets the first half offset data for missed / small hits in Special Figure 1 at high probability (step Y40).
9), the latter half offset data for special figure 1 length variation is set (step Y411). Also,
In the case of the special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 1 big hit at the time of high probability is set (step Y410), and the second half offset data for the special figure 1 length variation is set (step). Y411).

Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y412), and the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y413). End the setting process.

In other words, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the normal game state, in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation pattern considering the number of reservations in special figure 1 is determined for both the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern, and in the case of a miss. In the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 only for the first half fluctuation pattern. Further, in the special figure 1 variation display game in the specific game state, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of reservations in the special figure 1.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 48 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y26) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
4) was shown. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y421). When the probability is high (step Y421; Y), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y422), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y423). ), Step Y42
Move to 8.

On the other hand, when the probability is not high (step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y424). And when it is not a special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; N)
Sets the first half offset data for missed / small hits in Special Figure 2 at low probability (step Y42).
5), the latter half offset data for special figure 2 length variation is set (step Y427). Also,
In the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y426), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set (step). Y427).

Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y428), and the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y429). End the setting process.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452). , Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (
The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from (for the number of hold 1) (step Y453).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and when the special figure 1 is off (step Y454; Y), 2
The byte distribution process is performed (step Y455), and the process proceeds to step Y457. If the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), the sorting process is performed (step Y456), and the process proceeds to step Y457. If the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but if the result is off, the distribution value is 2 to enable various effects.
It is a part-time job.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1. And prepare (step Y458). Then, the distribution process (step Y459) is performed, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (
Step Y463), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1 (step Y464).

After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y467), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 variation pattern setting process, first, the latter half variation selection address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half variation selection table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). , The variation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 (step Y473).

Next, the distribution process is performed (step Y474), the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step Y475). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Then, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y476), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y477).
Next, obtain and prepare the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer (
Step Y478), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of the special figure 2 (step Y479).

After that, the distribution process (step Y480) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y481), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is set. Since there are few types of latter-half fluctuations in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the latter-half fluctuation group is not selected by the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 51 shows a 2-byte distribution process (step Y455) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the first data of the prepared second-half variable group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step Y501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table, since there is no need for distribution, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y502; Y).
Step Y507), the 2-byte distribution process is completed. On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step Y502; N), the first distribution value specified in the latter half variable group table is acquired (step Y5).
03).

Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y373 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step Y504), and the calculated new random number value is calculated. Is less than "0" (step Y505). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y506), the process shifts to step Y503, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do. That is, in step Y503, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variable group selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step Y505 as a new random number value, and further new disturbance. Calculate the numerical value (step Y504). And
It is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505).

In step Y505, the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y).
505; Y) is determined. As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the latter half fluctuation group table. Then, in step Y505, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 52 shows the distribution processing (steps Y456, Y459, Y465, Y474, Y480) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process and special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. In the distribution process, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation selection table) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation pattern group).

In this sorting process, first, the first data of the prepared second half variable selection table (selection table) and first half variable selection table (selection table) is a code without sorting (that is, "
It is checked whether or not it is "0") (step Y511). Here, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern or the first half fluctuation pattern, as in the latter half fluctuation group table, but distribution is necessary. In the case of a selection table without a distribution value, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the data at the head of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step Y512; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y517), and the distribution is performed. End the process. On the other hand, when the data at the beginning of the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), the first distribution value specified in the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is set. (Step Y513).

Next, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y513 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 2 or fluctuation pattern random number 3) to calculate a new random number value (step Y514), the calculation is performed. It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y515;
In N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the process shifts to step Y513, and the subsequent processes are performed.

That is, in step Y513, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step Y515 as a new random number value. , Further calculate a new random number value (step Y514)
.. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y).
515).

In step Y515, the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y).
515; Y) is determined. As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation number and the first half fluctuation number is selected from at least one second half fluctuation pattern and the first half fluctuation pattern defined in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table. Then, in step Y515,
If it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y), the data address corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step Y517), and the distribution process is completed.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
FIG. 53 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y247, Y267) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551), and when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), the information of the special figure 1 is set. The random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y552). Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y551; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, the random number storage area of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the special figure 2 is cleared (step). Y553).

Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y556), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step Y558).
), The added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y559).

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, is off or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, as the above-mentioned added value, the remaining time (time less than 60,000 ms) excluding the time that can be measured by using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times that the specified time (here, 60,000 ms) is measured, is calculated as the added value. It is supposed to be done.

After that, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y560), and if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y560; Y), the process proceeds to step Y564. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y560; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether the long variation of the special figure 2 has started (step Y561). The long variation is a variation pattern set when the result is out of order or a small hit in the normal game state in the special figure 2 variation display game, and is determined by the set variation pattern number.

Then, when it is not the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step Y561; N), 0 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y562), and the step Y564 is performed.
Move to. Further, when the long variation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y561; Y), 9 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y563), and the process proceeds to step Y564.

After that, a variable command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variable number is prepared (step Y564).
, The variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the latter half variation number is prepared (step Y565), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y566). Next, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y567), and when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y567; N).
Ends the fluctuation start information setting process. When the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y567; Y), the number of reserved special figures 1 is updated by -1 (step Y568), and the contents of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 are shifted (step Y569). ), Clear the free area after the shift (step Y570), and end the fluctuation start information setting process.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
Based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means, the game control device 100 starts the first variation display game by displaying the result and the variation mode information of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). It is the first decision-making tool that can be decided before. In addition, the game control device 100
A predetermined random number is extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 37, and the result and the variation mode information of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) are obtained based on the predetermined random number. It serves as a second determination means that can be determined before the start of the variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the second starting winning opening 37 fires on the other side of the game area 32. The game ball is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and is in a normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the second determination means is larger than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. It will be a long time.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information about patterns. By transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time for each of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game according to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time elapses. It serves as a measurement means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, is off or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set, but in this case, the variation is set. The information about the time may not be transmitted to the effect control device 300, but a command indicating only the long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply display the fluctuation, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command of long variation. The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the fluctuation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the variation display based on receiving the stop command. To do so. In this way, the burden of control on the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during change Transition setting processing]
FIG. 54 shows a special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y21) in the special figure 1 normal process.
6) was shown. In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
The initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of the display 51) is set (step Y606). Further, the initial value is set in the symbol number area during special figure 1 change (step Y60).
7), Special Figure 1 Ends the process transition setting process during fluctuation.

Special figure 1 The initial value set in the symbol number area during fluctuation is 0, so that the fluctuation display is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display has started by starting the variation display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation Transition setting processing]
FIG. 55 shows a special figure 2 change processing transition setting process (step Y23) in the special figure 2 normal process.
0) was shown. In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area.
An initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of the display 52) is set (step Y616). Further, the initial value is set in the symbol number area during the change in Special Figure 2 (step Y61).
7), Special figure 2 Ends the process transition setting process during fluctuation.

Special figure 2 The initial value set in the symbol number area during fluctuation is 0, so that the fluctuation display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display has started by starting the variation display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

It should be noted that when the variable display is started on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is assumed that all the segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any result mode, and if there is a segment that is not used in any result mode, the variation display is started from at least the state in which the segment is lit. You may try to do it. In addition, the variable display may be started from the state in which the same segment is always lit each time. In addition, special figure 1
The lighting mode when the display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 start to fluctuate may be the same or different.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
showed that. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step Y623).

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y625). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game machine may be forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, when the fluctuation is stopped, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627). Here, the display time is set to 600 ms in the case of a miss, 2000 ms in the case of a big hit, and 136 ms in the case of a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 1 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y629). When the special figure 1 is out of alignment (step Y629; Y)
Goes to step Y644. In addition, when the special figure 1 is not out of place (step Y629;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y630). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y640. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y).
630; Y) determines whether or not special drawing 2 is being displayed during processing (step Y631). That is, in this case, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 2 is in progress (step Y631; Y), the process proceeds to step Y633. If the special figure 2 is not being processed during display (step Y631; N), the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y632), and the display time of the special figure 1 set above as the display time of the special figure 2 is set. The display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y634), the command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y635), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y636). ). After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y638), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y639).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y640), and whether the special figure 1 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y641). In the case of a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. Also, if it is not a special figure 1 small hit (
Step Y641; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, load information from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (step Y642), and special figure 1 big winning opening opening information. Information is loaded from the area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y643).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y644), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y645).
, Special figure 1 Displaying process ends.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
showed that. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step Y653).

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y655). Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657). Here, 600 ms in the case of an outlier, 200 ms in the case of a big hit
A display time of 0 ms and 136 ms in the case of a small hit is set.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 2 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y659). When the special figure 2 is off (step Y659; Y)
Goes to step Y674. In addition, when the special figure 2 is not out of place (step Y659;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y660). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y670. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y).
660; Y) determines whether or not processing is being performed while the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y661). That is, in this case, based on the special figure 2 variable display game having a special result, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 1 is in progress (step Y661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y664. Further, when the special figure 1 display is not being processed (step Y661; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y662), and the process proceeds to step Y664.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), the command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y666). ). After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y668), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y669).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y670), and whether the special figure 2 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y671). In the case of a special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (
Step Y671; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, load information from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (step Y672), and special figure 2 big winning opening opening information. Information is loaded from the area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y673).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y674), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y675).
, Special figure 2 Displaying process ends.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
FIG. 58 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y645) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684). ), Special figure 1 Ends the process transition setting process 1 during the change.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
FIG. 59 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y675) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y694). ), Special figure 2 Ends the process transition setting process 1 during the change.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
FIG. 60 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y701), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y702).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 1 (step Y704).

Up to this point, the process is the same as that of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, and the information for obtaining the loss result is set below. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y706).

Next, the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area is cleared (step Y707), and the small hit flag 1
The deviation information is saved in the area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y709). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y710), and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y7).
11), the process transition setting process 2 during display of special figure 1 is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 is used. The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 2 (step Y724).

Up to this point, the process is the same as that of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, and the information for obtaining the loss result is set below. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y726).

Next, clear the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area (step Y727), and the small hit flag 2
The deviation information is saved in the area (step Y728), and the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step Y729). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y730), and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y7).
31), Special Figure 2 Displaying process Transition setting process 2 is terminated.

By the above processing of FIGS. 56 to 61, when one special figure variation display game has a special result, the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. That is, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, the first end control process is performed in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result, and the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. Based on this, the second end control process is performed in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of disconnection.

From the above, the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variable display game when the execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is performed. When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) whose execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variation display game that performs the execution control. Can be terminated as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game execution control means is executed by the first variable display game execution control means when the execution control of the second variable display game is performed. When the first variable display game being controlled has a special result, the second variable display game performing the execution control can be terminated as a result other than the special result. As a result, when a special result is derived in one variable display game, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped with the off result, so that a problem does not occur even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed. Can be.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
62 and 63 show the process during display of the special figure 1 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process (step Y).
110) was shown. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (
Step Y745), the small hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y746).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 area is loaded (step Y747) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (step Y748). Then, the special figure 1 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y749), and if it is not a big hit (step Y).
749; N) proceeds to step Y777. Also, if it is a big hit (step Y7)
49; Y) updates the jackpot count counter by +1 (step Y755). This jackpot count counter manages a specific period in which a high probability state can be set, and becomes 1 when the first special result is derived in the low probability state, and counts the number of times the first special result is derived in the specific period. It is a thing. Next, the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned on) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step Y756).

Then, the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation release command is prepared (step Y757), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal change notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special gaming state.

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y762), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y7).
63). After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y765). In response to the reception of this fanfare command, the effect control device 300 performs an effect of instructing the gate 34 to aim.

Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of this embodiment
In step Y766, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (for example, 5000 ms)
) Is set (step Y767), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768).

Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y755, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N),
That is, when the big hit flag 1 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is the small hit (small hit information) (step Y777). Then, when the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare (step Y783), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y787).

When the probability is not high (step Y787; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is OF.
Set to F. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing a left-handed strike is made.

On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y787; Y), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the launch position designation signal 1
Is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing a right-handed strike is made.

After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y792), and if it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y792; Y).
Clears the upper prize opening fraudulent winning number area (step Y793), saves the fraudulent monitoring period out-of-period flag in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and steps Y7.
Move to 97. Also, if it is not a small hit that opens the upper prize opening (step Y792; N)
), That is, in the case of a small hit that opens the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39)
Clear the lower prize opening fraudulent winning number area (step Y795), save the fraudulent monitoring period out-of-period flag in the lower grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y796), and step Y797.
Move to. Then, special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y79)
7) is performed, and the process of displaying Special Figure 1 is completed.

Further, when it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y806). FIG. 1 Normally, the process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y807), and special figure 1
Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
In FIGS. 64 and 65, the process during display of the special figure 2 in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process (step Y).
141) was shown. It should be noted that this special figure 2 display process is the same process as the special figure 1 display process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y805), and the small hit flag is flagged. Clear two regions (step Y806).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 region is loaded (step Y807) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, and the jackpot flag 2 region is cleared (step Y808). Then, the special figure 2 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y809), and if it is not a big hit (step Y).
809; N) proceeds to step Y837. If it is a big hit (step Y8)
09; Y) updates the jackpot count counter by +1 (step Y815), and turns on the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal) regarding the start of the jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) of the special figure 2 variation display game. (Turn on the signal per symbol 2) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Then, the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation release command is prepared (step Y817), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal change notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special gaming state.

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y822), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y8).
23). After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y825).

Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of this embodiment
In step Y826, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (for example, 5000 ms)
3000 ms or 4 ms) is set (step Y827), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828).

Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y834), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y835). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y836) is performed, and the processing during display of special figure 2 is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y815, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N),
That is, when the big hit flag 2 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is the small hit (small hit information) (step Y837). Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare (step Y843), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y847).

If the probability is not high (step Y847; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is OF.
Set to F. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing a left-handed strike is made.

On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y847; Y), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the launch position designation signal 1
Is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing a right-handed strike is made.

After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y852), and if it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y852; Y).
Clears the upper prize opening fraudulent winning number area (step Y853), saves the fraudulent monitoring period out-of-period flag in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and steps Y8.
Move to 57. Also, if it is not a small hit that opens the upper prize opening (step Y852; N)
), That is, in the case of a small hit that opens the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39)
Clear the lower prize opening fraudulent prize number area (step Y855), save the fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag in the lower grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y856), and step Y857.
Move to. Then, special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y85)
7) is performed, and the processing during display of special figure 2 is completed.

Further, when it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y866), and the special figure status area is cleared. FIG. 2 Normally, the process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y867), and special figure 2
Ends the process being displayed.

That is, the first special game in which the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variation winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variation display game has the first special result. A second special game generating means that forms a generating means and generates a second special gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Make.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 66 shows the fanfare / in the above-mentioned special figure 1 display processing and special figure 2 display processing.
Details of the process transition setting process during the interval (steps Y776, Y836) will be described. In this fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, first, the signal related to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y8).
71). Here, one big hit signal output by a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Next, the signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is O.
FF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal OFF,
Special symbol 2 Set the fluctuation time shortening status signal to OFF.

After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876).
As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are terminated, and the normal-probability state and the normal state are set.

Next, the jackpot information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the game state display number 2 area is in the right-handed state. Save the number (step Y881).

After that, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area for storing the special figure 2 abnormal change number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation frequency area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormality change notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting process is completed. That is, with the occurrence of the big hit, all the information related to the abnormal change in Special Figure 2 is cleared.

[Special figure 1 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 67 shows a special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y797) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 display process. In this special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893). Here, referring to the current gaming state, 1000 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of the specific gaming state, and 4 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of not in the specific gaming state. Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, one big hit signal output by a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on.
Set to.

After that, the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure 1
Ends the process transition setting process during small hit fanfare.

[Special figure 2 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 68 shows a special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y857) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 display process. In this special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903). Here, referring to the current gaming state, 1000 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of the specific gaming state, and 4 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of not in the specific gaming state. Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, one big hit signal output by a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is turned on.
Set to.

After that, the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2
Ends the process transition setting process during small hit fanfare.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
FIG. 69 shows the fanfare / in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing.
Processing during the interval (steps Y111, Y142) is shown. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y940).
In the case of the first round (step Y940; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 34 (step Y941), and in the case of no passage (step Y941; N), the fanfare / interval processing ends. To do.

If there is a passage (step Y941; Y), the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y942), and the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (16 or 10 in the case of the present embodiment). ) And save it in the upper limit area of the number of rounds (step Y)
943). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y944).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit that opens the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y945). When it is a big hit that opens the upper prize opening (step Y945;
Y) clears the upper prize winning opening fraudulent winning number area (step Y946), saves the fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag in the upper winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y947), and proceeds to step Y950. Also, if it is not a big hit that opens the upper prize opening (step Y945)
; N), that is, in the case of a big hit that opens the lower prize opening (second special variable winning device 39), the lower grand prize opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y948), and the lower grand winning opening fraud monitoring period Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the flag area (step Y949), and step Y9.
Move to 50. In step Y950, the on-output data of the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y950), and the process proceeds to step Y951.

On the other hand, if it is not the first round (step Y940; N), the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y951), and the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y952). Performs the effect command setting process (step Y9)
53).

Next, the jackpot processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y955). Then, the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957).
). The opening time set here is, for example, 29000 ms.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958), and if it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y959). ), The opening time of the large winning opening is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y962).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the upper prize opening (first special variable prize device 38) (
Step Y963). Whether it is a big hit of the upper prize opening opening can be determined from the set big winning opening opening information. If it is a big hit with the opening of the upper prize opening (step Y96)
3; Y) performs the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the large winning opening (step Y964), and ends the fanfare / interval process. If it is not a big hit to open the upper prize opening (step Y963; N), the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the big prize opening is performed (step Y965).
), Ends the fanfare / interval processing.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting process 1]
FIG. 70 shows the process transition setting process 1 (step Y964) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. This big winning opening is open processing Transition setting processing 1
First, the signal relating to the start of opening of the upper prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y972), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. The number of large winning openings is cleared (step Y973), and the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the large winning openings is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting process 2]
FIG. 71 shows the process transition setting process 2 (step Y965) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. This big winning opening processing while opening processing transition setting processing 2
First, the signal relating to the opening start of the lower prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the lower large winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y982), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. The number of large winning openings is cleared (step Y983), and the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning openings is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 72 shows the processing during opening of the large winning opening (steps Y112 and Y143) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this processing while the winning opening is open, first, the current number of rounds in the running special game state is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1005)
.. If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and the effect command setting process (step Y1008) is performed. If it is the final round (step Y100)
5; Y) prepares an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state (step Y1007), and performs an effect command setting process (step Y1008).

Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is set (step Y1009), and the remaining ball processing time is set.
As the processing number, 5 related to the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is set (step Y1010). The remaining sphere processing time is set to 600 ms, 800 ms, or 1400 ms. And
It is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011).

In the case of a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y1).
014), the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y10).
15).

After that, save the off-data in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1).
016), the process of opening the large winning opening is completed. In step Y1016, off-data is set for both the upper winning opening solenoid and the lower winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for each of the winning openings.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
FIG. 73 shows the large winning opening remaining ball processing (steps Y113, Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the running special game state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area. (Step Y1041)
..

Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y).
1041; N) saves a signal relating to the end of opening the large winning opening in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF, and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, the interval time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and the fanfare / processing during the interval 3 is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round to the elapse of the remaining ball processing time, and further from the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the elapse of the interval time. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, the interval period is 2000 ms, and in this interval period, the interval effect is produced by the display device 41 or the like. Is executed.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step Y1).
041; Y) performs the jackpot end processing transition setting process (step Y1045), sets the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y1046), and sets the special figure 1 jackpot end process or the special figure 2 jackpot as the processing number. Set 6 for the end process (step Y1)
047).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1048). In the case of a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1049).
Step Y1050), the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is the period from the end of the final round to the lapse of the remaining ball processing time and the lapse of the remaining ball processing time to the lapse of the ending time. For example, if the opening / closing pattern 1 of the special figure 1 upper prize opening is 1, 1
Since the remaining ball processing time of 400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, the ending period is 11000 ms, and the ending effect is executed by the display device 41 or the like during this ending period.

[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 74 shows the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step Y1045) in the above-mentioned jackpot remaining ball processing. In this jackpot end processing transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the end of opening of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071).
.. Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is turned off.
Set to.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state (step Y1074).

Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the flag for storing the opening information determination for the large winning opening is stored in the large winning opening opening information area. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the jackpot middle control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the jackpot opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the jackpot end processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 75 shows the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y11) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
4) was shown. In the special figure 1 big hit end process, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure 1 normal process (step Y1101), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1102).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y).
1103). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1104).
.. Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1105), and the light is turned off.
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step Y11)
06), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the lower prize opening (step Y1107), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1108). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y11).
09).

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the processing to start the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variation display game. Can be started earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1109,
The start process of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt. That is, until the game control device 100 can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state, until the first variable display game execution control means can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game.
It serves as a game processing standby means for preventing the second variable display game execution control means from making the process related to the start of the second variable display game executable.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot count counter is the upper limit value (step Y1110).
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first special result is derived in the low probability state for the first time, and the high probability state is set after the end of the special game state until the number of times the first special result is derived is five. It is configured in. The jackpot count counter counts the number of times the first special result is derived, and is 1 when the first special result is derived in the low probability state, and the upper limit is 5.

When the value of the jackpot count counter is not the upper limit value (step Y1110; N), the process of setting the high probability state is performed. In this process, first, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1).
111). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1112).
Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1113). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number with high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1114). In addition, in the game machine of this embodiment, since the time is always shortened during the high probability, these are not distinguished and are referred to as the numbers in the high probability.

After that, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y111).
5), save the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1116),
Save the probability information command (high probability) in the transmission command area when the power is restored (step Y1).
117), special figure 1 jackpot end processing is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot count counter is the upper limit value (step Y1110; Y), the process of setting the low probability state is performed. In this process, first, the jackpot count counter is cleared (step Y1118), and the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1119). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the no time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1120). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2
The high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal are set to OFF.

Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1121). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1122). After that, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1123), and the low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1124). Further, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1125), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y1126), and the special figure 1 jackpot end process is completed.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 76 shows the special figure 2 jackpot end process (step Y14) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
5) is shown. This special figure 2 big hit end process is the step Y11 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit process.
The processing is the same except that 09 is not performed. First, as a processing number related to special figure 2 normal processing, "
0 ”is set (step Y1131), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1132).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y).
1133). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1134).
.. Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1135), and the light is turned off.
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step Y11)
36), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the lower prize-winning opening (step Y1137), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1138). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot count counter is the upper limit value (step Y1139), and if the value of the jackpot count counter is not the upper limit value (step Y1139; N), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y114).
0). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1141). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1142). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number with high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1143). In addition, in the game machine of this embodiment, since the time is always shortened during the high probability, these are not distinguished and are referred to as the numbers in the high probability.

After that, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y114).
4), save the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1145),
Save the probability information command (high probability) in the transmission command area when the power is restored (step Y1).
146), special figure 2 jackpot end processing is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot count counter is the upper limit value (step Y1139; Y), the process of setting the low probability state is performed. In this process, first, the jackpot count counter is cleared (step Y1147), and the signal regarding the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1148). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the no time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1149). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2
The high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal are set to OFF.

Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1150). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1151). After that, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1152), and the low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1153). Further, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1154), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y1155), and the special figure 2 jackpot end process is completed.

By these special figure 1 big hit processing and special figure 2 big hit processing, the derivation of the first special result in the low probability state is the first time, and until the number of times of derivation of the first special result reaches 5, after the end of the special game state. A specific gaming state, which is a high probability state, will be set. That is, the game control device 100
However, after the end of the special gaming state, it serves as a probability setting means capable of setting the probability that the result of the game becomes the first special result among the special results to be a high probability state higher than the low probability state. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes a special result is higher than the normal state after the end of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (steps Y115, Y146) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, in this small hit fanfare middle process, first, branching is performed according to an open pattern (step Y1).
201).

If the opening pattern is the small hit 1 (lower large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1) in step Y1201, the command during opening the small hit opening of the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step Y1202). ), The effect command setting process is performed (step Y1203). next,
As the processing number, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set (step Y1204), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1205).

After that, the small hit opening time 1 (48 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, save the lower prize opening on-data in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (
Step Y1208) and step Y1230.

Further, in step Y1201, the opening pattern is a small hit 2 (lower large winning opening opening / closing pattern 2).
If this is the case, a command for opening the small hit opening of the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step Y1209), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y1210).
Next, as the processing number, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set (step Y1211), and special figure 2
The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1212).

After that, the small hit opening time 2 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

Further, in step Y1201, the opening pattern is a small hit 3 (upper large winning opening opening / closing pattern 3).
If this is the case, a command during the opening of the small hit opening of the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step Y1216), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y1217).
Next, as the processing number, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set (step Y1218), and special figure 2
The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1219).

After that, the small hit opening time 3 (1200 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

Further, in step Y1201, the opening pattern is a small hit 4 (upper large winning opening opening / closing pattern 4).
If this is the case, a command during the opening of the small hit opening of the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step Y1223), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y1224).
Next, as the processing number, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set (step Y1225), and special figure 2
The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1226).

After that, the small hit opening time 4 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process proceeds to step Y1230. After performing processing according to these small hit types, clear the large winning opening count area that counts the number of winnings to the large winning openings (
Step Y1230), the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed.

[Small hit medium processing]
FIG. 78 shows the small hit medium processing (steps Y116, Y147) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this small hit middle process, first, the small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y12).
42). Next, branching is performed according to the open pattern (step Y1243).

In step Y1243, when the opening pattern is a small hit 1 (lower big winning opening opening / closing pattern 1), 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1244).
, Special figure 1 Save the processing number in the game processing number area (step Y1245). And
The small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (600 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247), and the small hit is in progress. End the process.

In step Y1243, when the opening pattern is small hit 2 (lower big winning opening opening / closing pattern 2), 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1248).
, Special figure 2 The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1249). And
The small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (600 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251), and the small hit is in progress. End the process.

In step Y1243, when the opening pattern is a small hit 3 or 4 (upper big winning opening opening / closing pattern 3 or 4), 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1252), and a special drawing is made. 2 Save the processing number in the game processing number area (step Y1253)
). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (800 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), and the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255). End the hit processing.

In steps Y1247, Y1251 and Y1255, off-data is set for both the upper winning opening solenoid and the lower winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for each of the winning openings.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
FIG. 79 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117, Y148) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit is a small hit in FIG. 1 (step Y1271). In the case of the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; Y), 10 related to the special figure 1 small hit end processing is set as the processing number (step Y1271; Y).
Step Y1272), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y).
1273). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (
Step Y1274) and step Y1278.

If it is not the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; N), 10 related to the special figure 2 small hit process is set as the processing number (step Y1275), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

Regardless of which of the small hits of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the small hit ending time is set (steps Y1274, Y1277) with reference to the current gaming state, and if it is a specific gaming state, the small hit ending 1200 ms or 1400 ms is set as the time, and 100 ms is set as the small hit ending time when not in the specific gaming state. As a result, the length of the ending period including the remaining ball processing time and the ending time is 2000 ms in the specific game state, and 700 ms or 900 ms in the non-specific game state.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Furthermore, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step Y127).
9), the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 80 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y11) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
8) was shown. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 1 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y130).
5), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1306), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1307). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y1308), and if the probability is high (step Y1308; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1311. Also, if it is not in high probability (
Step Y1308; N) saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (step Y1309). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1310).
, The special figure 2 game wait time value (8 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1311), and the special figure 1 small hit end process is terminated. Here, too, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 variable display game. And special figure 2 The variable display game is processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 81 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y14) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
9) was shown. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y13).
35). After that, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y13).
36), clear the special figure status area (step Y1337). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y1338), and if the probability is high (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. If the probability is not high (step Y1338; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF.
Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1340).
), Special figure 2 The small hit end process is completed.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
FIG. 82 shows the symbol variation control processing (steps Y120, Y153) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. The symbol fluctuation control process is a process of controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 and setting the display data of the special symbol. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is changing (step Y1401).

Then, when the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1402; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1403), and the blinking control timer related to the symbol to be controlled is acquired. Is updated by -1 (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step Y1405).

If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), step Y140
Move to 8. When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer (here, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step Y1406), and the symbol to be controlled is controlled. The variable symbol number according to the above is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number region is acquired (step Y1408). After that, save the acquired display data in the target segment area (
Step Y1411), the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1410).
), Save the acquired display data in the target segment area (step Y1411), and
The symbol fluctuation control process is terminated. As a result, among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled.

[Segment LED editing process]
FIG. 83 shows the segment LED editing process (step X) in the timer interrupt process described above.
112) was shown. In this segment LED editing process, the storage display unit 54 provided in the batch display device 50, a round display that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39). Part 55, the first game state display unit 56 that notifies the player of the hitting method that is advantageous to the player among left-handed (normal) and right-handed, and the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game. Segment L constituting the probability display unit 57 to be notified
Make settings related to driving the ED.

In this segment LED editing process, first, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the storage display unit 54 is defined is set (step X601), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired, and a segment is obtained. Save to the area (step X602). Next, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 55 is defined is set (step X603), display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step X604).

Then, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the probability display unit 57 is defined is set (
Step X605), the display data corresponding to the game status display number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X606). After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 56 is defined is set (step X607), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step X607). Step X608), the segment LED editing process is completed.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
FIG. 84 shows a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above.
showed that. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

In this magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the third input port 12 is output from the magnetic sensor 61.
From the state of the detection signal captured in 4 (input port 3), it is determined whether the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch) is on, that is, a state in which abnormal magnetism is detected (step X611).
). When the magnet sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 to check whether the timer has timed up. Determine (step X613).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step X613; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X).
614), the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (60,000 ms in this case) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step X615). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step X616), and a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X6).
17), it is determined whether the prepared magnet invalid flag matches the value of the magnet invalid flag region (step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611; N).
That is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618), and if the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step X619). .. The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step X613; N), the process proceeds to step X619.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, when the time has been up or has already been up, the fraudulent notification period has expired, or the fraudulent notification has been issued from the beginning. If not, prepare a command to end the magnet fraud notification (step X621).
). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622).
, It is determined whether the prepared magnet invalid flag matches the value of the magnet invalid flag region (step X623).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), the effect command setting process is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is completed. To do.

[Screen radio wave fraud monitoring process]
FIG. 85 shows the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) in the timer interrupt process described above.
)showed that. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of the fraudulent notification are set.

In this panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the proximity I / F12 is output from the panel radio wave sensor 62.
From the state of the detection signal taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via 1a, it is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, a state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (
Step X631). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (here, 60000 ms).
Is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step X632).

Then, a command for illegally notifying the board radio wave is prepared (step X633), a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X634), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not 0, or -1 is updated ( Step X635). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step X63).
6).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step X636; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the fraudulent notification period has expired, or the fraudulent notification has been issued from the beginning. If this is not done, prepare a command to end the board radio wave fraud notification (step X637), prepare a board radio wave fraud release flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X638), and set the prepared board radio wave fraud flag to the board radio wave. Determine if it matches the value in the invalid flag area (step X63)
9).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X639; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X640), the effect command setting process is performed (step X641), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring is performed. End the process.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 86 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the timer interrupt process described above.
showed that. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step X105), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108), and the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113)
, Processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or amusement park internal management device or a test firing test device based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) and set it in the output buffer. And so on.

In this external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701), and if a glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main body frame (front frame 12) is being generated. ) Determine if an open error is occurring (step X702).
When the main body frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the off data of the security signal is saved as external information. It is saved in the output data area (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; Y) or the main body frame (step X701; Y)
Front frame 12) When an opening error is occurring (step X702; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), and the game machine error status signal is displayed. Save the on-data in the test signal output data area (step X706)
, Step X707. That is, the information that the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are open is output as external information.

Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not 0, the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (step X707). ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is 0.
Is set to.

Then, when the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N),
That is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. As a result, it is output as external information that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized. When the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), is the frame radio wave fraud occurring, which is to detect an abnormal radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12. Is determined (step X709).

When the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. Further, when the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (step X71).
1). Then, when the switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch error is occurring (step X)
711; Y) saves the on-data of the game machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (step X712), and proceeds to step X713.

Then, during magnet fraud (step X713; Y), board radio wave fraud is occurring (step X7).
14; Y), a large winning opening fraud is occurring (step X715; Y), and special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step X716; Y), the on-data of the security signal is output as external information. Save in the data area (step X718), save the on-data of the game machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (step X719), and step X7.
Move to 20. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information. If none of the errors in steps X713 to X716 has occurred, the off-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and step X72.
Move to 0.

Then, the start port 1 signal editing process (step X720) for editing the winning signal to the first starting winning opening 36 and the starting port 2 signal editing process (step X721) for editing the winning signal to the second starting winning opening 37 are performed. Do. Next, the main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the symbol fixed number signal editing process for setting the information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is performed. (Step X723), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Starting port 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 87 shows the start port 1 signal editing process (step X72) in the above-mentioned external information editing process.
0) was shown. In this start port 1 signal editing process, first, the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0.
If not, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the number of start port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733).
).

Then, when the number of times of signal output of the start port 1 is not 0 (step X733; N), the start port 1 is used.
The number of signal outputs is updated by -1 (step X734), and the initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is saved in the start port 1 signal output control timer area (step X735). The initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal. (For example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the start port 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the start port 1 signal editing process is completed. Further, when the number of times of output of one signal at the start port is 0 (step X7).
33; Y) saves the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738), and ends the start port 1 signal editing process.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N),
It is determined whether the start 1-port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X736).
.. The fact that the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X736; Y), the process is performed in step X7.
Move to 37. Further, when the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step X736; N), the off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device is set to RWM.
It is saved in the external information output data area of (step X738), and the start port 1 signal editing process is completed. The start port 2 signal editing process (step X7) in the above-mentioned external information editing process.
21) performs the same processing as the start port 1 signal editing process for the start port 2 signal.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 88 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X7) in the above-mentioned external information editing process.
22) is shown. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case) to an external device. It is a process.

In this main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is 0 (step X743).
).

When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not 0 (step X743; N), the number of times of main prize ball signal output is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal is output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X745). The initial value of this main prize ball signal output control timer is the ON state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal.
Time (eg 128ms) and off state (eg low level) time (eg 64)
It is the time obtained by adding ms) (for example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X).
747), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed. When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step X743; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X74).
6). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X746; Y), the process shifts to step X747. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step X746; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

[Symbol confirmation count signal editing process]
FIG. 89 shows a symbol determination number signal editing process (step X) in the above-mentioned external information editing process.
723) was shown. The symbol fixed number signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information related to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed.

In this symbol confirmation count signal editing process, first, if the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is not 0, the symbol is updated by -1 (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). When the value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation count signal output count, which is updated by +1 each time the special symbol variation display game ends, is 0. (Step X753).

When the number of symbol confirmation number signal output is not 0 (step X753; N), the number of symbol confirmation number signal output is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main prize ball signal is output to the symbol confirmation number signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X755). The initial value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (here, 256 ms) of the symbol confirmation count signal in the on state (for example, high level) and the time (here, 300 ms) in the off state (for example, low level). The time (here, 556 ms) is set. Since the game machine of the present embodiment can simultaneously execute the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the on state time is set to 256 ms and the off state time is set to 300 ms.

After that, the on-data that turns on the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the symbol confirmation count signal editing process is completed. When the symbol confirmation count signal output count is 0 (step X753; Y), the off data for turning off the symbol confirmation count signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). X758), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N).
Determines whether the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X).
756). The fact that the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms) or more.
When the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X756; Y)
Moves the process to step X757. When the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step X756; N), the off data for turning off the symbol confirmation count signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X7
48), the symbol editing count signal editing process is completed.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 90 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 90, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP 312 is performed (step C3) to allow interrupts (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C).
5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure detection detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal, and the LED by the player
The hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the liquid crystal and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect is performed. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, a V blank interrupt (1/6) is used to create a system cycle (1/30 second per frame).
When 0 seconds) is entered twice, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process that controls LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 (step). C18), a panel that performs a movable body control process (step C19) that controls the motor, solenoid, and reel 6 of the panel effect device 44, and controls the effect by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. The effect setting process (step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 91 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (1/30 second).
Step C201), it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (step C202).
.. Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), The command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer.
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 92 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
To determine if the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C23).
4).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in the step C234 that the ACT for the MODE is not the correct combination (step C232; N, step C233; N). C2
34; N) ends the received command analysis process.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (
In step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of variable commands (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235).
In Y), a variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C235, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
In step C235; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C237, when it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command processing (step C239; Y) is performed.
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C239, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the symbol command (
In step C239; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of one-shot commands such as a hold number command and an error command (step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that are established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of one-shot commands (step C24).
In 1; Y), a one-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of one-shot commands (
In step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol-based command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (step C2)
44) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N)
Ends the received command analysis process.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern will be obtained) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be displayed. It is a production such as performing a production display on. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 93 shows a variable command process (step C2) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process.
36) was shown. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-mentioned symbol system command processing.

When this special figure type is undecided (step C361; Y), the variable command processing ends. If the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C361; N).
Step C362), it is determined whether the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C362).
363).

If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variable command process ends. If the variable command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C3).
63; N) determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 16R jackpot symbol, a 10R jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol. The case where the fluctuation command and the symbol type are inconsistent is when the deviation command (variation pattern command) is received, but the symbol command of the 16R jackpot symbol is received. It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, the variation effect setting process for setting the information for performing the effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure change is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366).
). Here, the special map is changing means that the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of times of pre-reading execution) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command processing is terminated.

[Variable effect setting process]
FIG. 94 shows a variation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-mentioned variation system command process.
)showed that. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is reachless variation (step C381). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach fluctuation (
Step C381; Y) sets the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode at that time (step C382). Since it is a variation without reach, the symbol type is always a missed symbol, and it is not necessary to refer to the symbol type in particular here. The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and is naturally different depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability variation mode, and the like. Further, each mode is provided with a plurality of modes in which the distribution rate of the advance notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of MODE and special figure type is acquired (step C383).
.. As a result, in the case of non-reach variation, it is possible to change the lottery content of the advance notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each advance notice effect mode) that appears during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, a lottery for notices appearing during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice distribution group table (step C386).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half is changing using the first half notice distribution group table. The notice lottery that appears in is performed (step C386).

Next, a lottery will be drawn for the notice production of the latter half fluctuation. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a variation display in a special result mode (combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of a plurality of columns of the special figure is a big hit). Is stopped and the variable display is displayed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C387). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half notice distribution group table.
Then, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and during the second half fluctuation (during reach) using the second half notice distribution group table. Lottery for notice of appearance (step C389)
).

After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390), and the result is determined.
The content of the production corresponding to the notice lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, the production and notice of the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game and the main reach contents will be determined. Further, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol is performed with reference to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.) of the special figure variation display game, the notice content, and the game state (step C392).
).

Next, the display setting of the variable effect is set (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is set (step C393).
Step C394). By these processes, it becomes possible to execute the effect and the advance notice in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above. After that, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to reduce the decorative start memory display in response to the decrease in the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure variation display game.

Then, the sound number which is the BGM number, the decoration number which is the number indicating the type of the effect by the decoration lamp, etc. are set (step C396), and the decoration special figure variation (variation display of the identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display settings are made (step C397). Further, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol that displays the decorative special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C398). , Ends the variable effect setting process.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 95 shows a one-shot command process in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this one-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the model designation command including the information about the model set in the game control device 100 (step C261).
.. Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), the model setting process for rewriting the internal information to the model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and the single-shot command process is performed. To finish.

Further, when it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), RA indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized.
It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the M initialization command (step C263). And M
When it is determined that the ODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263).
In Y), the RAM initialization process is performed (step C264), and the one-shot command process is terminated. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), the area required for initialization is initialized, and R
Set the AM initialization screen information. Further, the scenario data for RAM initialization is set in order to produce an effect when RAM initialization is performed.

If it is determined in step C263 that the MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE is given a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has recovered from the power failure without being initialized. It is determined whether it corresponds (step C265). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), the power failure recovery process is performed (step C266), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area required for initialization is initialized, and the recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to produce an effect at the time of power failure recovery.

If it is determined in step C265 that the MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y),
The customer waiting demo process is performed (step C268), and the one-shot command process is terminated. In the customer waiting demo process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set during the customer waiting demo, and the customer waiting scenario data is set in order to perform the customer waiting effect.

Further, when it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), the MODE determines whether or not the special figure 1 is on hold (step C267; N).
Step C269). Then, when MODE is on hold in Special Figure 1 (step C269; Y).
), The special figure 1 hold information setting process for displaying the decorative start memory display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed (step C270), and the single-shot command process is terminated. If it is determined in step C269 that the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 hold (step C269; N), the MODE determines whether the special figure 2 hold (step C271). Then, when the MODE is on hold in Special Figure 2 (step C271; Y), the MODE performs a special figure 2 hold information setting process (step C2) that performs a process corresponding to the hold that has occurred.
72), the one-shot command processing is terminated. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a start memory display means for displaying a start memory notification display that displays information related to the start memory by a start memory display (decorative start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

Further, in step C271, when MODE is not on hold in FIG. 2 (step C271; N).
), It is determined whether the MODE is the probability information (step C273). And MOD
When E is probability information (step C273; Y), the probability information setting process for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

Further, in step C273, when MODE is not probability information (step C273; N).
The MODE determines whether it is an error / invalidity (step C275). And MO
When the DE is an error / invalid (step C275; Y), the error / invalid setting process for performing corresponding processing such as error notification is performed (step C276), and the one-shot command processing is terminated. In the error / illegal setting process (step C276), a notification process when a command related to an error or an error is received, a warning display process when a right-handed instruction notification command or a left-handed instruction notification command is received, and the like are performed. ..

Also, in step C275, if MODE is not an error / invalid (step C275;
In N), MODE determines whether or not the effect mode is switched (step C277). Then, when the MODE is the effect mode switching (step C277; Y), the effect mode switching process for switching the effect mode is performed (step C278), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

Further, in step C277, when MODE is not the effect mode switching (step C277).
In N), MODE determines whether the symbol is stopped (step C279). And M
If the ODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the one-shot command processing is terminated. Further, when the MODE is a symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is normal (step C280). In the determination of whether or not the command is normal, for example, it is determined whether or not the target of the decorative special figure stop command is the target of the currently changing special figure.

Then, if the command is not normal (step C280; N), the one-shot command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure stop setting is made (step C281), and if all the symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). , Ends single-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 96 shows the jackpot command process (step C) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process.
238) was shown. In this jackpot command process, first, MODE determines whether or not it is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). When the MODE is a fanfare (step C401; Y), the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare display image according to the big hit type and the small hit is performed (step C402), and the P machine state is set during the fanfare. The setting (step C403) is performed, and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state. When the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the number of rounds display information is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set during the round (step C406). End the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE is not a round (step C404; N), the MODE determines if it is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to the interval between rounds. Then, when the MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), the interval effect setting process for setting the effect during the interval is performed (step C408), the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is hit. Terminate system command processing. If the MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the end of the final round or a small hit end screen command at the end of the small hit.

When MODE is the ending (step C410; Y), the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect at the end of the big hit or the small hit is performed (step C4).
11), the P machine state is set during the ending (step C412), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. If MODE is not the ending (step C410; N),
MODE determines whether it is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a large winning opening count command based on winning a prize in the special variable winning device.

If MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the jackpot command process ends. When the MODE is a count (step C413; Y), the count effect setting process (step C414) for setting the effect corresponding to the winning of the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the jackpot command process is completed.

Next, the production of the game will be described. FIG. 97 shows the symbol arrangement of the reels 6a, 6b, 6c. Each reel is provided with identification information of numbers 1 to 9 and identification information of a peach pattern.
The symbol indicated by the star is a blank symbol, not a symbol constituting the result mode. FIG. 98 shows a decoration special result which is a special result of the decoration special figure variation display game executed by the variation display device 4. When the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a special result, the decorative special result corresponding to the special result is arranged on one of the effective lines. If the result is off, the display will be such that the special results will not be displayed on any of the effective lines.

The decoration special result is associated with the special result differently depending on the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2). As shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b), for the 16R jackpot, the special result of decoration in which three odd-numbered same numbers are lined up and the special result of decoration in which three peach patterns are lined up correspond to 10R regardless of the special figure type. For big hits, regardless of the type of special figure, the special result of decoration in which three even numbers with the same number are lined up corresponds. Further, for small hits 1 to 4, the special result of decoration in which the numbers "123" are lined up corresponds to the special figure 1, and the special result of decoration in which three peach patterns are lined up corresponds to in special figure 2.

The decorative special figure variation display game displayed by the variation display device 4 has different target special map types depending on whether or not it is in a specific game state (high probability state), and corresponds to the main variation according to the game state. Decorative special figure variable display Display the game. That is, if it is not in a specific gaming state, Special Figure 1
Ornamental special figure 1 corresponding to the variable display game The variable display game is displayed, and in the case of a specific gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed. This will
Regarding the small hit, the display of the result mode on the variable display device 4 differs depending on whether or not it is in the specific gaming state.

Further, in the decoration special figure variation display game in the specific game state, the variation mode is selected according to the special result, and the special result can be discriminated by the variation mode until the decoration special result is derived. In the variation effect setting process shown in FIG. 94, the decoration special result to be used is selected depending on whether or not it is in the specific gaming state, and the variation mode according to the special result is selected for the selection of the variation pattern in the case of the specific gaming state. I am trying to do it.

It should be noted that the correspondence between the special result and the decorative special result is different depending on the type of special figure, but the correspondence is not limited to this. For example, the correspondence between the special result and the decorative special result may be different depending on whether or not the game is in a specific game state. Further, although it is not used in the game machine of the present embodiment, it is in a so-called latent state in which the probability state is not clearly notified, or in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won. When a convertible normal variable winning device is provided at the starting winning opening, the special result and the decorative special result are based on whether or not the normal variable winning device is in the open state and the winning is easy. The correspondence of may be different. Also,
Based on the effect mode managed by the effect control device 300, the correspondence between the special result and the decorative special result may be different, such as a predetermined period (predetermined number of games, predetermined time) after the end of the special game state. The correspondence between the special result and the decorative special result may be different in an arbitrary period in the game or in an arbitrary period based on the time information of RTC338.

FIG. 99 shows the fluctuation display device 4 and the display device 4 in a low probability state, which is a case where the game is not in a specific gaming state.
An example of the production in 1 is shown. These controls are controlled by the effect control device 300 based on the control information received from the game control device 100, and are mainly set in the variation effect setting process shown in FIG. 94.

In the low probability state, the variation display device 4 displays the decorative special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game which is the main variation. Further, at the lower left of the display area of the display device 41, a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 for displaying the special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is provided. Here, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is displayed by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information. Further, in the lower right portion of the display area, a decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 for displaying the special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is provided. Here, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is displayed by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information.

In the center of the display area, a storage display unit 83 for displaying the decorative start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is provided. The decorative start memory display displayed here has a one-to-one correspondence with the first start memory and is displayed side by side in the order of storage, and here, it is shown that there are four first start memories. The decorative start memory display at the left end is the decorative start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left each time it is digested. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to each start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode.

At the center of the display area and to the left of the storage display unit 83, an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game currently being executed is provided. At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the decorative start memory display at the left end of the special figure 1 variable display unit 83 is transferred to the running memory display unit 84, and the result, fluctuation pattern, etc. of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed Is suggested by the display mode.

When the first start memory is digested and decreases from the state shown in FIG. 99 (a), as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the first memory display unit 83 is the running memory display. Part 84
Is displayed to flow into. Here, the execution memory display unit 84 also suggests the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like in the same manner as the look-ahead effect.

Then, the variable display device 4 starts the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory, and the variable display of each reel 6 is started. Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 also starts the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, and the variable display of the identification information is started in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas.

After that, first, the left reel 6a of the fluctuation display device 4 is stopped as shown in FIG. 99 (c), and then the right reel 6c of the fluctuation display device 4 is stopped as shown in FIG. 99 (d). Here, the same identification information is stopped at each of the right-up line and the right-down line to be in the reach state, and the reach effect is started. Of course, there are cases where different identification information stops on the valid line and the reach state is not reached. In this way, the first half fluctuation is until the right reel 6c is temporarily stopped in the reach state, and the second half fluctuation is thereafter.

Then, at the end of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 99E, the middle reel 6b of the fluctuation display device 4 is stopped, and all the reels 6 are stopped, and the result is displayed. Here, it is shown that the decoration special results are not aligned on any of the effective lines and the results are out of order. Further, even in the decorative special figure 1 variation display game display unit 81, the variation display of the identification information ends in each of the left region, the middle region, and the right region, and the result is stopped and displayed. The result of the loss is also displayed here.
After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop time. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 99 (f), the display of the running storage display unit 84 is erased, and the next special figure variation display game can be started.

If there is no start memory in the state of FIG. 99 (f), the customer is waiting. In addition, FIG. 99 (f)
), If the result is the first special result (big hit), it is in the first special game state, and the gate 34
By passing the game ball to, the round game in the first special game state is started.
If the result is the second special result (small hit) in the state of FIG. 99 (f), the decorative special result of "123" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the variation display device 4, and the second special game state. Will be started.

FIG. 100 shows an example of the effect of the variable display device 4 and the display device 41 in the specific game state (high probability state). In the high probability state, the variation display device 4 displays the decorative special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game which is the main variation. Further, a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 for displaying a decorative special figure 1 variable display game is provided at the lower left of the display area of the display device 41, and a decorative special figure 2 variable display is provided at the lower right of the display area. A decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 for displaying a game is provided. A storage display unit 83 for displaying a decorative start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is provided in the upper right portion of the display area. The decorative start memory display displayed here displays the number of first start memories numerically.

At the lower center of the display area, an execution storage display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game currently being executed is provided. The result of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like, which are also executed by the execution storage display unit 84, are suggested by the display mode. Further, in the upper center of the display area, an acquisition number display unit 85 for displaying the number of prize balls acquired in a predetermined period is provided. Here, the prize balls obtained by winning the special variable prize device in the small hit generated from the end of the special game state to the start of the next special game state during the advantageous period in which the player can obtain a large number of prize balls. The cumulative value of the number is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 100A is a state in which the special gaming state based on the small hit is completed. In this state, in the variable display device 4, the decorative special result in which the peach pattern is aligned with the middle line is stopped and displayed as the result mode in response to the result of the small hit that generated the special game state. Decorative special drawing 2 The variable display game display unit 82 is also in a state in which the result mode of “123” is stopped and displayed in response to the result of the small hit that generated the special game state.

From this state, when the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is started, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is started accordingly. Special Figure 2 When the result of the variable display game is off or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), the variable display in which each reel 6 operates so as to swing up and down is started. At this time, each reel 6 moves up and down so that the peach symbol of each reel 6 does not deviate from the range of the symbol display window 5 which is the display area.
The execution mode of this decorative special figure variation display game forms the first execution mode.

Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result is a small hit, as shown in FIG. 100 (d), the variable display device 4 stops and displays the decorative special result in which the peach patterns are lined up on the effective line as the result mode. The decoration special figure variation display game in the variation display device 4 in the specific game state is the decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game which is the main variation, and the decoration special result corresponding to the small hit is peach. This is the result mode in which the symbols of are aligned. That is, when the result is a small hit, it is possible to recognize that it is a small hit by stopping and displaying this decorative special result after the variable display is performed in the first execution mode. Further, in the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82, the result mode of "123", which is the result mode corresponding only to the small hit, is stopped and displayed.

When the result is out of order, as shown in FIG. 100 (e), the variation display device 4 stops and displays the out-of-order result mode in which the peach symbols are not lined up on the effective line. Even when displaying the result mode of this deviation, the decoration special figure 2 in the variation display device 4 The pattern display window in which the peach symbol of each reel 6 constituting the small hit decoration special result in the variation display game is the display area. The result mode that does not deviate from the range of 5 is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the result mode of the detachment is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 100 (e), as long as the peach pattern does not line up on the effective line. In addition, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 also stops and displays the result mode of the detachment.

On the other hand, if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game started from the state of FIG. 100 (a) is out of order or a big hit, the variation display in which each reel 6 rotates in one direction as shown in FIG. 100 (c). Is started. At this time, the peach symbol constituting the decoration special result of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game in the variation display device 4 is out of the range of the symbol display window 5 which is the display area. The execution mode of this decorative special figure variation display game forms the second execution mode.

Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the result mode is stopped and displayed. If the result is incorrect, Fig. 1
As shown in 00 (e), in the variable display device 4, the decoration special figure 2 in the variable display device 4 is the display area of the peach pattern of each reel 6 constituting the small hit decoration special result in the variable display game. As a result of the deviation that does not line up on the effective line at a position that does not deviate from the range of the symbol display window 5, the mode is stopped and displayed.

Further, when the result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 100 (f), the variation display device 4 stops and displays the result mode in which the symbols corresponding to the special result are lined up on the effective line. That is, when the result is a big hit, it is possible to recognize that it is a big hit by stopping and displaying the decorative special result corresponding to the special result after the variable display is performed in the second execution mode. Here, it is a 16R jackpot and the decoration special result of "777" is stopped and displayed, but the decoration special result that the same peach pattern as the small hit is also associated with the 16R jackpot, and this peach pattern is aligned. The special decoration result may be displayed as a stop. Further, in the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82, the result mode of "777", which is one of the result modes corresponding only to the big hit, is stopped and displayed.

By making the variation mode different between the big hit and the small hit in this way, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the type of the special result. In particular, in the specific game state, the fluctuation time is shortened, the special figure fluctuation display game is executed frequently, and the small hits occur frequently and the jackpot occurrence interval is short, so that the special result occurs frequently. There is. In such a gaming state, the player
It is possible to grasp the type of special result derived from the time of variable display, and there is room to pay attention to the opening of special variable winning devices other than the decorative special figure variable display game, so it is a specific game state that is advantageous for the player. Can effectively enhance the interest of. In addition, the same decoration special result (here, the decoration special result in which the peach patterns are aligned) may be stopped and displayed for the big hit and the small hit, but it becomes possible to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit depending on the variation mode. ..

Although the first execution mode and the second execution mode are shown as the execution modes of the variable display, other execution modes may be provided and assigned to the special result. For example, a plurality of execution modes may be assigned to one special result. Further, the execution mode may be different between the 16R jackpot and the 10R jackpot. In addition, it may be difficult to determine which hit is the hit by providing an execution mode that can be selected in common for the big hit and the small hit. Further, a specific execution mode may be assigned to a specific special result not only in the specific gaming state but also in other gaming states.

Further, as for the decoration special result on the decoration special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 and the decoration special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82, the decoration special result shown in FIG. 98 (a) shall be used regardless of the game state. Although the type of the special result can be discriminated even in the specific game state, the decorative special result of FIG. 98 (b) may be used as in the variable display device 4.

Further, in the first execution mode and the second execution mode, whether or not the peach symbol constituting the special result of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game in the variation display device 4 is out of the range of the symbol display window 5. However, other differences are also differences in the execution mode. For example, in the first execution mode, the reel 6 operates in the direction opposite to the forward direction, whereas in the second execution mode, the reel 6 operates only in the forward direction. Further, in the first execution mode, the reel 6 operates without making one revolution, whereas in the second execution embodiment, the reel 6 makes one revolution.

In addition to this, the operation mode of the reel 6 may be different between the first execution mode and the second execution mode. For example, both the first execution mode and the second execution mode make it possible to operate the reels 6 so as to swing, and in the first execution mode, all the reels 6 operate so as to swing, whereas in the second execution mode, the reels 6 operate so as to swing. Only a part of the reels 6 may be operated so as to swing, and the other reels 6 may be rotated. Further, the operating directions of the reels 6 may be different between the first execution mode and the second execution mode. In the first execution mode, all the reels 6 operate in opposite directions, whereas in the second execution mode, the second execution mode. Then, all reels 6 may be operated in the forward direction. Also, some reels 6
May rotate in the opposite direction so that the number of reels 6 operating in the opposite direction differs between the first execution mode and the second execution mode. Further, the light emitting mode of the backlight of the reel 6 may be different between the first execution mode and the second execution mode.

From the above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game production is controlled in the game machine 10 that generates a special game state advantageous to the player. The effect control means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the effect control means executes a decorative game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed in accordance with the game and then the result is stopped and displayed, and the result of the game is regarded as a special result. In this case, the decoration special result is configured to be stopped and displayed in the decoration game, and one decoration special result corresponds to a plurality of special results.
Therefore, the same decorative special result can be displayed even if the special result is different, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when executing a decoration game capable of stopping and displaying a plurality of special results and corresponding decoration special results, the effect control means is selected as an execution mode of the decoration game according to the type of the special result. It means that the mode can be set. Therefore, the interest of being able to grasp the type of special result is born from the execution mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as a specific execution mode, the effect control means performs variable display in a state where all of the identification information constituting the decorative special result corresponding to the plurality of special results exists in the display area, and stops and displays the decorative special result. The first embodiment and the second embodiment in which a variable display is performed in which a part or all of the identification information constituting the decorative special result corresponding to the plurality of special results moves out of the display area, and the decorative special result is stopped and displayed. And, one of them is selected according to the type of specific special result. Therefore, it becomes easy to distinguish between the first execution mode and the second execution mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the variable display device 4 for displaying the decorative game is provided, and the effect control means can change the decorative game to be displayed on the variable display device 4 according to the game state. The decoration special result displays a decoration game corresponding to a plurality of special results, and one decoration special result displays a decoration game corresponding to one special result except in a predetermined gaming state. Therefore, in a predetermined game state, it becomes easy to grasp the special result, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, an execution mode of the decorative special figure variation display game when a big hit occurs in irregular variation will be described. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation in the low probability state, which is not the specific gaming state. The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is irregular fluctuation, is very long, but in the low probability state, it is unlikely that a special result will be derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, and it is a small hit. Since the probability is low, there is a possibility that a special result will be derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. In this case, the game control device 100 sends a command to notify that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 which is the information to that effect is longer.
Based on this information, the effect control device 300 sets a specific execution mode for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game executed by the variable display device 4.

FIG. 101 shows an example of a specific execution mode. The state shown in FIG. 101A is a state in which a new special figure 1 variable display game is started while the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a big hit in the low probability state, is being executed. New special figure 1 The fluctuation time of the variable display game is special figure 2
The variation display game is shorter than the remaining variation time of the game, and information to that effect is transmitted from the game control device 100. Along with this, the effect control device 300 sets a specific execution mode for the new special figure 1 variation display game in the variation effect setting process shown in FIG. 94.

As shown in FIG. 101 (b), in a specific execution mode, the backlight of each reel 6 is turned off, and a variable display is performed such that each reel 6 swings up and down. In addition, the display device 41 displays "pounding mode!" To indicate that the execution mode is specific. In addition, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 starts variable display.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends, the variable display of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 ends, and the result mode of the big hit is stopped and displayed. Along with this, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated with a disconnection result, and the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 8
The variation display of 1 is completed, and the result mode of the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the variation display device 4 displays the stop display of the result mode of the disconnection.

When the stop time for displaying the result ends, the special game state is started and the fanfare period is entered. With the start of this fanfare period, the display device 41 displays a display prompting a right-handed strike. Further, with the start of this fanfare period, the variation display device 4 shows FIG. 101 (
As shown in d), a variable display for rotating each reel 6 is performed, and during the fanfare period, a decorative special result is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 101 (e). After that, the round is started on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 34, and the special variable winning device is opened.

By adopting such a specific execution mode, it is possible to derive a special result of irregular fluctuation without discomfort and execute a special game state. Further, in the variable display device 4, special figure 1
Since the results of both the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be displayed in sequence, the player can check each result. In particular, an appropriate game progress can be performed in a game machine using a reel having a low degree of freedom in display.

In addition, the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is an irregular fluctuation, is displayed during the special game state, and during the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game, either the main fluctuation or the irregular fluctuation becomes a special result. However, even if both are off, the result of the main fluctuation will always be displayed.

In the high-probability state, which is a specific game state, the special figure 2 variation display game is set as the main variation.
Special Figure 1 Variable display The game is designed to have irregular fluctuations. Since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is the main fluctuation, is short and special results are derived with high frequency,
Special Figure 1 It is unlikely that a special result will be derived in a variable display game, and a specific execution mode is not set. Of course, the same specific execution mode may be set when the special result of the special figure 1 variable display game is derived.

In addition, if the special figure 2 variable display game ends with a forced loss result due to a small hit, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display device 4 is displayed with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game. Is displayed as a stop display in a result mode other than the special result, and a special game state based on a small hit is performed as it is. In this case, the stop position of the reel 6 is the position when the stop command is received, and the reel 6 is stopped even when the symbol is not on the effective line.

Further, it is assumed that a specific execution mode is set when the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, but the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is special. FIG. 1 The specific execution mode may be started when the fluctuation display game is shorter than the maximum fluctuation time set when the game is out of order. In this way, the period for executing the specific execution mode can be set to a certain period.

Based on the above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game machine 10 that generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player makes a start winning opening. The first variable display game execution control means for executing the first variable display game based on the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37 forming the starting winning opening, and the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening. (Game control device 100), the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) that executes the second variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, and the production of the game are controlled. The effect control means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the effect control means executes a decorative game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed in accordance with the game and then the result is stopped and displayed, and the result of the game is special. When a result is obtained, the decoration special result is stopped and displayed in the decoration game, and the first variation display game execution control means and the second variation display game execution control means are the first variation display game and the second variation. If the display games can be executed at the same time and one of the variable display games is running and the other variable display game has a special result, one of the variable display games is forcibly terminated with the result. It is configured to perform forced stop processing,
The effect control means sets a specific execution mode as an execution mode of the decorative game corresponding to the game in which the forced stop processing is performed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the forced stop may occur due to the specific execution mode.

Further, the effect control means is configured to display a decorative game corresponding to one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, which is predetermined according to the game state, on the variable display device. When the target game to be displayed as a game is forcibly stopped due to the deviation result due to the forced stop processing, the deviation result is displayed on the variation display device, and the variation display device is operated in the subsequent special game state to operate the other. It means that the decoration special result corresponding to the result of the game is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to show the result of both games to the player.

Next, the effect when a small hit occurs will be described. FIG. 102 shows a case where a small hit occurs in a low probability state that is not a specific gaming state. When the fluctuation time ends from the state in which the special figure 1 variation display game, which is a small hit as shown in FIG. 102 (a), is executed, the result is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 102 (b). Here, "123", which is a special decoration result corresponding to a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the upward-sloping line on the variable display device 4. In addition, "123", which is a special decoration result corresponding to a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the decoration special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81.

After that, the special game state based on the small hit is started, but at the stop time shown in FIG. 102 (b) except that the display of the executing storage display unit 84 is erased as shown in FIG. 102 (c). It remains displayed. Then, when the special game state ends, the next special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 102 (d). In this way, in the low probability state, no special effect is performed in the special game state based on the small hit, so as shown in FIG. 6, the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period are set to the minimum necessary time and are smooth. It enables the progress of various games.

FIG. 103 shows a case where a small hit occurs in a high probability state which is a specific gaming state. Figure 1
As shown in 03 (a), the decoration special figure 2 variable display game, which is a small hit, operates so that each reel 6 swings up and down so that the peach symbol does not deviate from the range of the symbol display window 5 which is the display area. Variable display is performed. After that, when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the variation display device 4 stops and displays the decoration special result in which the peach patterns are lined up on the effective line as the result mode. In addition, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 stops and displays the result mode of "123", which is the result mode corresponding to the small hit.

In the special gaming state based on the small hit, first, in the small hit fanfare period, FIG. 103 (
As shown in c), a promotion display 86 for prompting a prize to the special variable prize-winning device is performed instead of the execution storage display unit 84. Then, when the small hit fanfare period ends, the special variable prize device is opened, and the game ball wins the special variable prize device, the number of prize balls acquired is shown as shown in FIGS. 103 (d) and 103 (e). The value of the number display unit 87 is updated every time a prize is won. At this time, the numerical value is not updated in the acquired number display unit 85.

After that, when the opening of the special variable winning device is completed and the small hit ending period is reached, FIG. 10
As shown in 3 (f), the result display 88 showing the result of the number of prize balls acquired in the special game state is displayed, and the value of the number of prize balls acquired in the special game state is added to the acquired number display unit 85. To. When the small hit ending period ends and the special game state ends, the display of the running storage display unit 84 is resumed, and the next special figure variation display game can be executed.

In this way, in the high probability state, a special effect is performed in a special game state based on a small hit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period are sufficient times to execute the effect. It is possible to effectively notify the information on the number of prize balls, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the specific game state in which many prize balls can be obtained.

Next, the notification unit 72 has a function of notifying the number of times the special result is derived in a specific period and a function of notifying information on the number of prize balls from the end of the special game state to the derivation of the next special result.
The notification mode in the above will be described.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the derivation of the jackpot (first special result) in the low probability state is set as the first time.
In the period until the number of times the jackpot is derived is 5, it is configured to be in a high probability state which is a specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. In the high-probability state, the next big hit can be easily derived, and the frequency of small hits increases because the game progresses mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game. During the period from the derivation of the jackpot in this low probability state to the end of the special gaming state based on the derivation of the jackpot a predetermined number of times, the special gaming state based on the jackpot and the high probability state alternately occur and the player Since a large number of prize balls can be easily obtained and it is an advantageous period for the player, this period is set as an advantageous period.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the right side of the center case 40, the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, the third notification unit 72c, and the fourth notification unit 72 are provided with LEDs capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors. The notification unit 72d is provided. The first notification unit 72a is assigned a number "1", the second notification unit 72b is assigned a number "2", the third notification unit 72c is assigned a number "3", and the fourth notification unit 72c is assigned a number "3". The number "4" is attached to the notification unit 72d. This number indicates the number of jackpots that occurred in the advantageous period, excluding the jackpots derived in the low probability state that triggers the start of the advantageous period. That is, it indicates the number of jackpots that occurred in a high probability state. Further, the notification unit 72 indicates the number of jackpots that occurred in the advantageous period depending on the lighting mode of the LED.

The number of times the jackpot is derived during the advantageous period can be grasped by adding 1 to the number of the notification unit, and it can be said that the notification unit notifies the number of times the jackpot is derived during the advantageous period. Further, the remaining number of times the jackpot is derived in the advantageous period can be grasped by subtracting 4 from the number of the notification unit, and it can be said that the notification unit notifies the remaining number of times the jackpot is derived in the advantageous period. Of course, a number may be added to the notification unit so as to correspond to the number of times the jackpot is derived or the number of times the remaining number of times is derived.

FIG. 104 shows an example of the notification mode in the notification unit 72. In the state where the game is played in the low probability state, the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, the third notification unit 72c, and the fourth notification unit 72d, which form the notification unit 72, are turned off. Then, when the special result of the big hit (first special result) is derived in the low probability state and the special gaming state is started (t31), the first notification unit 72
a, the second notification unit 72b, the third notification unit 72c, and the fourth notification unit 72d start blinking. The blinking state indicates that the big hit corresponding to the notification unit 72 has not yet occurred, and the state in which the four notification units 72 are blinking means that the number of times the big hit is derived in the high probability state is 0. It shows that the remaining 4 jackpots can be derived.

When the special gaming state based on the jackpot generated in the low probability state ends (t32), the high probability state is reached. In this high-probability state, the game progresses with the special figure 2 variation display game as the main variation, and small hits occur frequently, so that the player can win a large number of prize balls. The period from the start of this high-probability state to the occurrence of the next big hit (t32 to t33) is set as the first counting period, and the number of prize balls acquired during this first counting period is counted. Further, the counted result is displayed on the acquired number display unit 85 of the display device 41.

Then, when the first big hit in the high probability state, which is the next big hit, occurs (t33), the first notification unit 72a is turned on, the second notification unit 72b, the third notification unit 72c, and the fourth notification unit 7
2d remains blinking. This indicates that the number of times the jackpot is derived in the high probability state is one. In addition, the first notification unit 72a is lit with a light emitting color corresponding to the counting result in the first counting period (t32 to t33) ended by the occurrence of the big hit. That is, the first notification unit 72 is in a state of simultaneously notifying the notification of the number of times the jackpot is derived in the high probability state and the counting result in the first counting period.

The emission colors that notify the counting result are white, blue, yellow, purple, in order from the one with the smallest counting result.
Five colors of red are available. The rainbow-colored light emission that sequentially changes each color is used when deterministically notifying the derivation of a special result in the production of the special figure variation display game in the display device 41, and is used by the notification unit 72. Since there is a risk of misunderstanding as if the derivation of the special result was foretold, it is not used as the emission color to notify the counting result.

When the special game state based on the first big hit in the high probability state ends (t34), the high probability state is reached. Then, the period from the start of this high probability state to the occurrence of the next big hit (t34 ~
With t35) as the second counting period, the number of prize balls acquired during this second counting period is counted. Further, the display of the acquired number display unit 85 is set to 0 with the start of the second counting period, and the counting result in the second counting period is displayed.

When the second big hit in the high probability state, which is the next big hit, occurs (t35), the first notification unit 72a and the second notification unit 72b are lit, and the third notification unit 72c and the fourth notification unit 72d blink. It remains in the state. This indicates that the number of times the jackpot is derived in the high probability state is two. In addition, in the second notification unit 72b, the second counting period ended due to the occurrence of the big hit (
It is in a state of being lit with a light emitting color corresponding to the counting result in t34 to t35). The first notification unit 72a is maintained in a state of being lit with a light emitting color corresponding to the counting result in the first counting period, that is, the first notification unit 72a and the second notification unit 72b derive a jackpot in a high probability state. It is in a state where the notification of the number of times and the counting result in each counting period are notified at the same time.

When the special game state based on the second big hit in the high probability state ends (t36), the high probability state is reached. Then, the period from the start of this high probability state to the occurrence of the next big hit (t36 ~
With t37) as the third counting period, the number of prize balls acquired during this third counting period is counted. Further, the display of the acquired number display unit 85 is set to 0 with the start of the third counting period, and the counting result in the third counting period is displayed.

When the third big hit in the high probability state, which is the next big hit, occurs (t37), the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, and the third notification unit 72c are lit, and the fourth notification unit 72d blinks. It remains in the state. This shows that the number of times the jackpot is derived in the high probability state is three times. In addition, in the third notification unit 72c, the third counting period (3rd counting period) ended due to the occurrence of the big hit (
It is in a state of being lit with a light emitting color corresponding to the counting result in t36 to t37). The first notification unit 72a is maintained in a state of being lit in a light emitting color corresponding to the counting result in the first counting period, and the second notification unit 72b is in a state of being lit in a light emitting color corresponding to the counting result in the second counting period. Is maintained. That is, the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, and the third notification unit 72c are in a state of simultaneously notifying the notification of the number of times the jackpot is derived in the high probability state and the counting result in each counting period.

When the special game state based on the third big hit in the high probability state ends (t38), the high probability state is reached. Then, the period from the start of this high probability state to the occurrence of the next big hit (t38 ~
With t39) as the fourth counting period, the number of prize balls acquired during this fourth counting period is counted. Further, the display of the acquired number display unit 85 is set to 0 with the start of the fourth counting period, and the counting result in the fourth counting period is displayed.

When the fourth big hit in the high probability state, which is the next big hit, occurs (t39), the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, the third notification unit 72c, and the fourth notification unit 72d are turned on.
This shows that the number of times the jackpot is derived in the high probability state is four. Also, the 4th
The notification unit 72d is in a state of being lit with a light emitting color corresponding to the counting result in the fourth counting period (t38 to t39) ended by the occurrence of the big hit. Regarding the first notification unit 72a, the first
The state of being lit with the emission color corresponding to the counting result in the counting period is maintained, and the second notification unit 72
Regarding b, the state of being lit with the emission color corresponding to the counting result in the second counting period is maintained, and for the third notification unit 72c, the state of being lit with the emission color corresponding to the counting result in the third counting period is maintained. .. That is, the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, and the third notification unit 72.
In c and the fourth notification unit 72d, the notification of the number of times the jackpot is derived in the high probability state and the counting result in each counting period are simultaneously notified.

When the special game state based on the fourth big hit in the high probability state ends (t40), the low probability state is reached and the advantageous period ends. Then, the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, the third notification unit 72c, and the fourth notification unit 72d are turned off, and the display device 41 displays in a low probability state.

In this way, by notifying the number of prize balls acquired in the period until the next first special result is derived in the advantageous period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the player's ball holding is increased even during the period until the next first special result is derived in the advantageous period, and the player's holding ball is reduced as in the conventional case. It has a game playability different from that of waiting for the derivation of the next special result. For this reason, the matter of how many prize balls are acquired in the period until the next first special result is derived in the advantageous period is also an important matter related to the interest of the player. By notifying the number of prize balls acquired during this period by the notification unit 72,
The amount of profit earned by the player can be shown in an easy-to-understand manner, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Count effect setting process]
FIG. 105 shows the count effect setting process (step C414) in the above-mentioned jackpot command process. In this count effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the period is advantageous (step C501). If it is not in this advantageous period (step C501; N), the count effect setting process is terminated. In this case, the game ball wins the special variable winning device in the special gaming state based on the small hit generated in the low probability state, and no special effect is performed.

Further, in the case of an advantageous period (step C501; Y), the winning prize ball counter is updated by +15 (step C502), and the total number of winnings counter is updated by +15 (step C503).
The winning prize ball counter counts the number of prize balls won by winning a prize in the special variable winning device during a predetermined period in the advantageous period. In addition, the total number of winning counters counts the number of prize balls won by winning a prize in the special variable winning device during the advantageous period. Here, 15 prize balls are generated by winning the special variable prize device, so each counter is updated by +15.

After that, the display of the acquired number display unit 85 of the display device 41 is updated (step C504), and the count effect setting process is completed. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired in the high probability state is displayed on the acquired number display unit 85, but the number of prize balls acquired in the special game state during the special game state is displayed on the acquired number display unit 85. You may do so. Further, although the total number of acquisitions is not displayed, it may be displayed.

[Notification information setting process]
FIG. 106 shows the notification information setting process performed in the board effect setting process (step C20) in the above-mentioned main process. In this notification information setting process, first, it is determined whether the timing is the start timing of the advantageous period (t31 in FIG. 104) (step C511). When it is the start timing of the advantageous period (step C511; Y), the display of the notification unit 72 is started (step C512). As a result, the blinking display of the notification unit 72 is started. Next, the winning prize ball counter area is cleared to 0 (step C513), the total number of winnings counter area is cleared to 0 (step C514), and the notification information setting process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is not the start timing of the advantageous period (step C511; N), it is determined whether the timing is the end timing of the advantageous period (t40 in FIG. 104) (step C515). When it is the end timing of the advantageous period (step C515; Y), the display of the notification unit 72 ends (step C516). As a result, the notification unit 72 is turned off. Next, the value of the winning prize ball counter is saved as history information (step C517). The number of prize balls acquired in the last special game state in the advantageous period is recorded in the prize ball counter acquired at this timing, and this value is saved as history information. Then, the value of the total acquired number counter is saved as history information (step C518), and the notification information setting process is completed. The total number of winning balls is recorded in the total number of winning counters from the start of the advantageous period, and this value is saved as history information.

On the other hand, when it is not the end timing of the advantageous period (step C515; N), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the first special gaming state. Here, the start timing of the special gaming state when the advantageous period is started is not included, and the timings of t33, t35, t37, and t39 in FIG. 104 correspond.

When it is the start timing of the first special gaming state (step C519; Y), the light emitting mode of the notification unit is selected and set from the value of the winning prize ball counter (step C520). The number of prize balls acquired from the end of the previous special game state to the start of the current special game state is recorded in the prize ball counter acquired at this timing, and the light emission of the corresponding notification unit 72 based on this value. Select and set the mode. As a result, the corresponding notification unit 72 changes from the blinking state to the lighting state.

Next, the value of the winning prize ball counter is saved as history information (step C521). As a result, the number of prize balls acquired from the end of the previous special game state to the start of the current special game state is saved as history information. After that, the winning prize ball counter area is cleared to 0 (step C522), and the notification information setting process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is not the start timing of the first special gaming state (step C519; N), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the first special gaming state (step C523). Here, the end timing of the special gaming state when the advantageous period ends is not included, and t32 and t3 in FIG. 104 are not included.
The timings of 4, t35 and t36 correspond. If it is not the end timing of the first special gaming state (step C523; N), the notification information setting process ends.

Further, in the case of the end timing of the first special gaming state (step C523; Y), the value of the winning prize ball counter is saved as history information (step C524). As a result, the value of the number of prize balls acquired in the special game state ended this time is saved as history information. After that, the winning prize ball counter area is cleared to 0 (step C525), and the notification information setting process is completed.

In addition, in the special game state based on the fourth big hit in the high probability state that will be performed at the end of the advantageous period, the counting result of the number of prize balls in each counting period in the advantageous period and the type of big hit in the advantageous period. , Information on the type and number of small hits, the counting result of the number of prize balls in each special game state, the counting result of the number of prize balls in the entire period of the advantageous period, and the like, the result of the game in the advantageous period is displayed on the display device 41. You may do so. When notifying the counting result of the number of prize balls in each special game state or the counting result of the number of prize balls in the entire period of the advantageous period, the prize balls acquired in the special game state performed at the end of the advantageous period. In order to obtain the information on the number, the notification is performed after the remaining ball processing in the special game state is completed. Further, for the special gaming state performed at the end of the advantageous period in order to perform this notification, the ending time may be made longer than the other special gaming states. In the notification of these information, historical information that stores the counting results in each counting period can be used. Further, the history information may be referred to at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the effect button 25 or the like.

Further, although the notification unit 72 notifies the number of prize balls acquired by the emission color, it may be notified by an operation. For example, the larger the number of prize balls acquired, the larger the amount of protrusion toward the center of the game area, or the larger the rotation angle may be. Further, although the acquisition number display unit 85 is supposed to display the counting result in each counting period,
The counting results in each counting period in one advantageous period may be totaled, or the total number of acquisitions including the number acquired in the special gaming state in one advantageous period may be displayed.

In addition, although the number of prize balls due to winning in the special variable winning device is counted, the number of prize balls due to winning in other winning openings may also be added up. In this case, the game control device 100 transmits the number of prize balls based on the winning to each winning opening to the effect control device 300. Further, the number of game balls consumed by firing may be subtracted so that the net increase in the counting period can be counted. In this case, the number of launch balls is counted and subtracted from the number of prize balls obtained.

Further, two display units may be provided in one notification unit 72, one of which may display the counting result in the counting period corresponding to the other, and the other may display the type of the first special result derived. Further, the counting period may include the period of the special gaming state. For example, the first counting period is the period (t31 to t33) from the start of the special gaming state based on the first special result derived in the low probability state to the derivation of the next first special result, and the second counting period is the second. The period from the end of one counting period to the derivation of the next first special result (t33 to t35) may be set, and similarly, the third counting period may be t35 to t37 and the fourth counting period may be t37 to t40. Of course, the delimiter of the counting period can be set arbitrarily, and other delimiters may be used.

From the above, when the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (1st starting winning opening 36, 2nd starting winning opening 37) and the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. In the game machine 10 that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player, the effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect of the game and the result of the game are the first special result (big hit) among the special results. A probability setting means (game control device 100) for setting a probability to either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state is provided, and the probability setting means is in the low probability state. The derivation of the first special result is the first time, and the game is executed in a high probability state during the period from the derivation of the first special result to the number of times the derivation of the first special result reaches a predetermined predetermined number. The effect control means notifies the number of times the first special result is derived or the number of remaining times until the predetermined number is reached, and from the derivation of the first special result in the low probability state, the special based on the first special result of the predetermined number of times. Information on the counting result of the number of prize balls in a predetermined period of the advantageous period, which is the period until the game state ends, can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the advantageous period in which the player can obtain a large number of prize balls.

Further, the effect control means can count the number of prize balls in the counting period, which is the period from the end of the special gaming state in the advantageous period to the derivation of the next first special result, and a plurality of counting periods in one advantageous period. It is possible to notify each of the counting results in. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the advantageous period in which the player can obtain a large number of prize balls. In addition, it is possible to grasp the number of acquisitions other than the special game state in which the number of acquisitions is easily influenced by luck, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the effect control means displays the number of times the first special result is derived or the number of remaining times until the predetermined number is reached by using the notification unit 72 which corresponds one-to-one with the derivation of the first special result each time in the advantageous period. Information on the counting result of the number of prize balls in the counting period is displayed in the notification unit 72 corresponding to the derivation of the first special result that triggers the end of the counting period. Therefore, it is possible to inform the result of each counting period in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, the first starting winning opening 36 forming the starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening 37 forming the starting winning opening 37
The first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) that executes the first variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. Second variable display game execution control means (game control device 10) that executes the second variable display game based on
0), a specific game state generating means (game control device 100) that generates a specific game state in which the execution time of the second variable display game is set to be shorter than the normal state in the period of high probability state, and When the result of the game is the second special result of the special results, the second special gaming state is generated as a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and in the second variable display game. The probability that the second special result is derived is higher than the probability that the first special result is derived, and the effect control means counts the number of prize balls generated in the second special gaming state. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the advantageous period in which the player can obtain a large number of prize balls. In addition, it is possible to grasp the number of acquisitions other than the special game state in which the number of acquisitions is easily influenced by luck, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the production by the game points will be described. Game points are awarded by satisfying predetermined conditions in the game, and it is suggested that the more game points there are, the more likely it is that a state advantageous for the player such as the derivation of special results will occur. It has become. Game points are awarded when the start memory occurs or when the special figure variation display game starts.
It can be executed at any time, such as when a reach state occurs or when a specific effect is executed. In addition, the game points can be accumulated over a plurality of special figure variation display games.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation, which is a high possibility of becoming a big hit, is suggested by the game points, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the game points at a predetermined notification timing in the target special figure variation display game. It is supposed to be done. FIG. 107 (a) shows the degree of expectation suggested according to the value of the game points. When the game points are 20,000 points or more, the occurrence of the reach state is notified, and when the game points are 30,000 points or more, the occurrence of the SP reach state is notified. Further, when the game points are 40,000 points or more, the occurrence of a big hit is deterministically notified, and when the game points are 50,000 points or more, it is notified that the 16R big hit is made.

FIGS. 107 (b) to 107 (f) show an example of granting and using game points. FIG. 107
As shown in (b), game points can be given at the start timing of the special figure variation display game. In this case, each display unit of the point notification unit 73 is sequentially lit like a roulette wheel with the start of the special figure variation display game, and the display unit corresponding to the given point is lit. Here, it is shown that the points given are 100 points. Further, the given points are added to the cumulative value notification unit 74. Here, 100 points are added while the accumulated points are 0 points.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), game points can be given at the timing when the special figure variation display game is in the reach state. In this case, as the reach state occurs, each display unit of the point notification unit 73 is sequentially lit like a roulette wheel, and the display unit corresponding to the point to be assigned is lit. Here, it is shown that the points given are 10,000 points. Further, in the cumulative value notification unit 74, 10 points are obtained from the state where the cumulative points are 100 points.
000 points are added to make 10100 points.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), game points can be given at the timing when a new start memory is generated. Here, as a result of the preliminary determination of the new start memory that has occurred, it has been found that the special figure variation display game based on the start memory is out of order and SP reach is generated. Therefore, when deciding the points to be given, the cumulative value of points is 4.
Determine to be less than 0000 points. Here, the points given are 5000 points, and the cumulative value notification unit 74 adds 5000 points from the state where the cumulative points are 10100 points to obtain 15100 points. In addition, the storage display unit 83
In the decorative start memory display corresponding to the start memory in the above, a look-ahead notice effect for changing the display mode is performed.

After that, points were awarded multiple times, and the cumulative value was 376 as shown in FIG. 107 (e).
A predetermined notification timing is started when the point is 00 points. Along with this, FIG.
As shown in 7 (f), one light emitting unit of the expectation notification unit 75 is lit corresponding to 10000 points, and here, three light emitting units are lit. As a result, it is notified that SP reach will occur in the special figure variation display game being executed. Here, the fraction less than 10,000 points is deleted, but it may be left. The control related to the game points as described above is performed in the board effect setting process (step C20) in the main process shown in FIG. 90.

The board effect device 44 may be operated according to the number of lights of the expectation level notification unit 75. Further, although the game points are added at a predetermined timing, they may be subtracted at the predetermined timing. In addition, the special figure variation display game that is subject to the notice by using the game points is not limited to the special figure variation display game based on the start memory that has been found to be a special result or reach by the preliminary judgment, and can be set arbitrarily. is there. For example, the game points may be consumed by notifying in the special figure variation display game that is appropriately out of alignment so that the accumulated game points do not become too large. In the present embodiment, when the number of points exceeds 30,000 points, the occurrence of reach is announced. Therefore, it is preferable to use the game points by notification before the number of points exceeds 30,000 points. Conversely, if the notification is not performed even if the number of points exceeds 30,000 points, it is in a state where it is foretold that a reach or a special result will occur even if the notification is not performed.

Further, the cumulative value notification unit 74 may be used as the acquired number display unit 85. For example, the game points and the number of acquired points may be displayed in parallel. Further, the effect of the game points may not be performed in the specific game state, and the cumulative value notification unit 74 may be used as the acquired number display unit 85 in the specific game state.

Further, in the above embodiment, if one variable display game has a special result while the other variable display game is being executed, one variable display game is forcibly terminated with an outlier result. Although it was decided to perform forced stop processing, one of the variable display games was interrupted until the end of the special game state based on the other special result, and the one variable display game that was interrupted after the end of the special game state was interrupted. You may try to resume. Further, depending on the type of special result, it may be possible to select whether to forcibly end or interrupt the result as a result of deviation. For example, if the first special result (big hit) is derived in the other variable display game, one variable display game is forcibly terminated with a missed result, and the second variable display game is forced to end with the second special result. (
If a small hit) is derived, one of the variable display games may be interrupted.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically,
It has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly described. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the correspondence between the special result and the decorative special result differs depending on the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the decoration special results other than the specific game state have the same correspondence as in FIG. 98 (a), but as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the decoration special results in the specific game state are , The decoration special result in which three peach patterns are lined up corresponds to any of 16R big hit, 10R big hit, and small hit, and the decoration special result composed of numbers does not appear.

In the decoration special figure variation display game in the specific game state, the decoration special result displayed is the same regardless of the special result, but the variation mode is selected according to the special result, and the decoration special The special result can be discriminated by the variation mode until the result is derived. Figure 9
In the variation effect setting process shown in 4, the decoration special result to be used is selected depending on whether or not it is in the specific gaming state, and the variation mode according to the special result is selected for the selection of the variation pattern in the case of the specific gaming state. I have to.

The execution mode of the decorative special figure variation display game on the variation display device 4 in the specific game state is shown in FIG.
As shown in 0, if the result is off or a small hit, the variation display is performed in the first execution mode as shown in FIG. 100 (b), and the variation is as shown in FIG. 100 (d). Whether the special result of the decoration in which the peach pattern is lined up on the effective line of the display device 4 is stopped and displayed as the result mode, or FIG.
As a result of the deviation as shown in 0 (e), the mode is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of a missed result or a big hit, the variation display is performed in the second execution mode as shown in FIG. 100 (c), and FIG. 10
The result mode of the deviation as shown in 0 (e) is stopped and displayed, or the decorative special result in which the peach pattern is lined up on the effective line of the variable display device 4 in FIG. 100 (f) is stopped and displayed as the result mode. To.

By making the result mode in the variable display device 4 the same regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit in this way, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the occurrence of the special gaming state. In particular, in the specific game state, the fluctuation time is shortened, the special figure fluctuation display game is executed frequently, and the small hits occur frequently and the jackpot occurrence interval is short, so that the special result occurs frequently. There is. In such a gaming state, the player only needs to be aware that the special variable winning device will be released when the special result of the decoration of the peach pattern is stopped and displayed. Since there is room to pay attention to the opening of the variable winning device, it is possible to effectively enhance the interest of the specific game state, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, although a common decorative special result is used for each special result, the effective lines lined up may differ depending on the special result. For example, in the case of a 16R jackpot, the peach symbol may be arranged in the middle line, in the case of a 10R jackpot, the peach symbol may be arranged in the upper line, and in the case of a small hit, the peach symbol may be arranged in the lower line. Further, the execution mode may be different between the 16R jackpot and the 10R jackpot so that these can be discriminated.

Further, regarding the special decoration result on the decoration special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 and the decoration special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82, the decoration special shown in FIG. 98 (a) is obtained regardless of the game state and the special figure type. By using the result, it is possible to determine the type of the special result even in the specific game state, but the decorative special result of FIG. 108 (b) may be used as in the variation display device 4.

From the above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game production is controlled in the game machine 10 that generates a special game state advantageous to the player. The effect control means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the effect control means executes a decorative game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed in accordance with the game and then the result is stopped and displayed, and the result of the game is regarded as a special result. In this case, the decoration special result is stopped and displayed in the decoration game, and it is possible to make the correspondence between the special result and the decoration special result different depending on the game state. Therefore, it is possible to execute a decorative game having a different taste according to the game state, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, the effect control means makes the one decoration special result correspond to the one special result except for the predetermined gaming state, and the one decoration special result corresponds to a plurality of special results in the predetermined gaming state. It will be done. Therefore, the same decorative special result can be displayed even if the special result is different, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, in a predetermined game state, it becomes easy to grasp the special result, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when the effect control means stops and displays a plurality of special results and corresponding decoration special results as a result of the decoration game in a predetermined game state, the effect control means determines the execution mode of the decoration game according to the type of the special result. This means that the specific execution mode to be selected can be set. Therefore, the interest of being able to grasp the type of special result is born from the execution mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as the gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 36 1st start winning opening (starting winning opening)
37 Second start winning opening (starting winning opening)
38 1st special variable winning device (special variable winning device)
39 Second special variable winning device (special variable winning device)
100 Game control device (game control means, first variable display game execution control means, second variable display game execution control means, specific game state generating means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result.
A game control means that controls the game in an integrated manner,
A special variable winning device that is opened in the special gaming state is provided.
The special result is
It is possible to change the probability of being derived according to the gaming state, and the first special result that generates the first special gaming state by the derivation and
The probability of being derived is constant regardless of the gaming state, and there is a second special result that generates a second special gaming state by the derivation.
The probability that the second special result is derived is higher than the probability that the first special result is derived.
The game control means
The fanfare period, which is the period from the start of the second special gaming state to the start of opening of the special variable winning device, can be set.
Even in the second special game state based on the same second special result, the game state when the second special result is derived is specified that the fluctuation time of the variation display game is shorter than the normal game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the fanfare period can be made longer in the gaming state than in the normal gaming state.

Images